TDS200, TDS1000/TDS2000, TDS1000B/TDS2000B, And TPS2000 Series Digital Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual Tektronix TDS

Tektronix_TDS_Programmer_Manual

User Manual:

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 346 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Title Page
Table of Contents
- List of Figures
- List of Tables
Preface
- Related Documents
- Conventions
Getting Started
Command Syntax
Command Groups
Command Descriptions
Status and Events
Programming Examples
Appendix A: ASCII Code Chart
Appendix B: Factory Setup
Glossary
Index

Programmer Manual

TDS200, TDS1000/TDS2000,

TDS1000B/TDS2000B, and

TPS2000 Series Digital Oscilloscopes

071-1075-04

This document supports:

STPS2000 Series instruments, any version.

STDS1000B and TDS2000B Series instruments,

any version.

STDS2CM or TDS2CMA, any version, when

used in TDS1000 or TDS2000 Series instruments,

any version.

STDS2MEM any version, when used in most

TDS1000 or TDS2000 Series instruments (except

TDS1001 and TDS2004 models), any version.

STDS2CM, TDS2CMA, or TDS2MM any

version, when used in a TDS224 instrument, any

version.

STDS2CM or TDS2CMA version CMV:v1.04

and above, or TDS2MM any version, when used

in TDS210 and TDS220 instruments with

FV:v1.09 and above.

www.tektronix.com

owned by Tektronix or its subsidiaries or suppliers, and are protected by

national copyright laws and international treaty provisions.

Tektronix products are covered by U.S. and foreign patents, issued and

pending. Information in this publication supercedes that in all previously

published material. Specifications and price change privileges reserved.

TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix, Inc.

OpenChoice®is a registered trademark of Tektronix Inc.

Tektronix is an authorized licensee of the CompactFlash®trademark.

PictBridge is a trademark of the Standard of Camera & Imaging Products

Association CIPA DC-001-2003 Digital Photo Solutions for Imaging Devices.

Contacting Tektronix

Tektronix, Inc.

14200 SW Karl Braun Drive

P.O. Box 500

Beaverton, OR 97077

USA

For product information, sales, service, and technical support:

HIn North America, call 1-800-833-9200.

HWorldwide, visit www.tektronix.com to find contacts in your area.

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer i

Table of Contents

Preface vii............................................

Related Documents vii..................................

Conventions xi........................................

Getting Started

Getting Started 1--1.....................................

Syntax and Commands

Command Syntax 2--1...................................

Command and Query Structure 2--2.........................

Command Entry 2--6.....................................

Constructed Mnemonics 2--9..............................

Argument Types 2--11.....................................

Command Groups 2--15..................................

Acquisition Commands 2--15...............................

Calibration and Diagnostic Commands 2--16...................

Cursor Commands 2--17...................................

Display Commands 2--18..................................

File System Commands (TDS2MEM Module, TDS1000B,

TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Only) 2--19....................

Hard Copy Commands 2--20...............................

Horizontal Commands 2--21................................

Math Commands 2--22....................................

Measurement Commands 2--23.............................

Miscellaneous Commands 2--25.............................

PictBridge Commands (TDS1000B and TDS2000B Only) 2--27...

Power and Battery-Related Commands (TPS2000 Only) 2--28.....

Power Measurement (TPS2000 with TPS2PWR1 Power

Analysis Application Key Installed Only) 2--28.............

RS-232 Commands 2--32..................................

Save and Recall Commands 2--32...........................

Status and Error Commands 2--33...........................

Trigger Commands 2--34..................................

Vertical Commands 2--36..................................

Waveform Commands 2--37................................

Waveform Data Formats 2--40..............................

Table of Contents

ii TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Waveform Data Record 2--42...............................

Waveform Data Locations and Memory Allocation 2--42.........

Waveform Preamble 2--43.................................

Scaling Waveform Data 2--43...............................

Transferring Waveform Data 2--43...........................

Command Descriptions 2--45..............................

Status and Events

Status and Events 3--1...................................

Registers 3--1...........................................

Status Registers 3--1..................................

Enable Registers 3--4..................................

The Enable Registers and the *PSC Command 3--6.........

Queues 3--6............................................

The Output Queue 3--6................................

The Event Queue 3--7.................................

Event Handling Sequence 3--8.............................

Synchronization Methods 3--10.............................

Using the *WAI Command 3--11.........................

Using the BUSY Query 3--13............................

Using the *OPC Set Command 3--14......................

Using the *OPC? Query 3--16............................

Messages 3--17..........................................

Programming Examples

Programming Examples 4--1.............................

Appendices

Appendix A: ASCII Code Chart A--1.......................

Appendix B: Factory Setup B--1...........................

TDS1000B and TDS2000B Series Oscilloscopes B--1...........

TPS2000 Series Oscilloscopes B--3.........................

TDS1000 and TDS2000 Series Oscilloscopes B--5.............

TDS210 and TDS220 Oscilloscopes B--6.....................

TDS224 Oscilloscopes B--8................................

Glossary and Index

Table of Contents

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer iii

List of Figures

Figure 2--1: Command message elements 2--4...............

Figure 2--2: Block Argument example 2--14..................

Figure 3--1: The Standard Event Status Register (SESR) 3--2..

Figure 3--2: The Status Byte Register (SBR) 3--3.............

Figure 3--3: The Device Event Status Enable Register

(DESER) 3--5.......................................

Figure 3--4: The Event Status Enable Register (ESER) 3--5....

Figure 3--5: The Service Request Enable Register (SRER) 3--5.

Figure 3--6: Status and event handling process 3--9...........

Figure 3--7: Command processing without using

synchronization 3--11..................................

Figure 3--8: Processing sequence with synchronization 3--11....

Table of Contents

iv TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

List of Tables

Table 1--1: Communications ports and functions 1--1........

Table 1--2: Oscilloscope, extension module, and

adapter compatibility 1--2............................

Table 2--1: Oscilloscope communication protocol 2--1........

Table 2--2: BNF notation 2--2............................

Table 2--3: Command message elements 2--3................

Table 2--4: Comparison of Header Off and Header

On responses 2--5....................................

Table 2--5: Types of numeric arguments 2--11................

Table 2--6: Oscilloscope handling of incorrect

numeric arguments 2--12..............................

Table 2--7: Parts of a block argument 2--13..................

Table 2--8: Acquisition commands 2--15.....................

Table 2--9: Calibration and Diagnostic commands 2--16.......

Table 2--10: Cursor commands 2--17.......................

Table 2--11: Display commands 2--18.......................

Table 2--12: File System commands 2--19...................

Table 2--13: Hard Copy commands 2--20....................

Table 2--14: Horizontal commands 2--21....................

Table 2--15: Math commands 2--22.........................

Table 2--16: Measurement commands 2--24..................

Table 2--17: Miscellaneous commands 2--25.................

Table 2--18: PictBridge commands (TDS1000B

and TDS2000B only) 2--27.............................

Table 2--19: Power and Battery-Related commands

(TPS2000 only) 2--28.................................

Table 2--20: Power Measurement commands

(TPS2000 with TPS2PWR1 only) 2--29..................

Table 2--21: RS-232 commands 2--32.......................

Table of Contents

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer v

Table 2--22: Save and Recall commands 2--33................

Table 2--23: Status and Error commands 2--33...............

Table 2--24: Trigger commands 2--35.......................

Table 2--25: Vertical commands 2--36.......................

Table 2--26: Waveform commands 2--38....................

Table 2--27: Binary data ranges 2--41.......................

Table 2--28: Vertical position ranges using a 1X probe 2--68....

Table 2--29: DATa and WFMPre parameter settings 2--88.....

Table 2--30: Commands that generate an Operation

Complete message 2--170...............................

Table 2--31: Additional WFMPre commands 2--259............

Table 3--1: SESR bit functions 3--2........................

Table 3--2: SBR bit functions 3--4.........................

Table 3--3: No event messages 3--17........................

Table 3--4: Command error messages – CME bit 5 3--18.......

Table 3--5: Execution error messages – EXE bit 4 3--18........

Table 3--6: Device error messages – DDE bit 3 3--22..........

Table 3--7: System event messages 3--22.....................

Table 3--8: Execution warning messages – EXE Bit 4 3--23.....

Table 3--9: Internal warning messages 3--24.................

Table of Contents

vi TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer vii

Preface

This programmer manual provides information on how to remotely

operate your TDS200, TDS1000/TDS2000, TDS1000B/TDS2000B,

or TPS2000 series oscilloscope. You can use communication ports

and protocols, such as for the RS-232, the General Purpose Interface

Bus (GPIB), or Universal Serial Bus (USB) standards, to remotely

control and operate your oscilloscope.

Related Documents

Each series of oscilloscopes has a different set of documentation.

TPS2000 Series Manuals

For general operation, refer to the TPS2000 Series Digital Storage

Oscilloscope User Manual, a standard accessory.

Language TPS2000 series user manual part number

English 071-1441-XX

French 071-1442-XX

Italian 071-1443-XX

German 071-1444-XX

Spanish 071-1445-XX

Japanese 071-1446-XX

Portuguese 071-1447-XX

Simplified Chinese 071-1448-XX

Traditional Chinese 071-1449-XX

Korean 071-1450-XX

Russian 071-1451-XX

Preface

viii TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

For information on the TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Application,

refer to the TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Application User Manual,an

optional accessory available in eleven languages.

Language TDS2PWR1 user manual part number

English 071-1452-XX

French 071-1453-XX

Italian 071-1454-XX

German 071-1455-XX

Spanish 071-1456-XX

Japanese 071-1457-XX

Portuguese 071-1458-XX

Simplified Chinese 071-1459-XX

Traditional Chinese 071-1460-XX

Korean 071-1461-XX

Russian 071-1462-XX

TDS1000B and TDS2000B Series Manuals

For general operation, refer to the TDS1000B and TDS2000B Series

Digital Storage Oscilloscope User Manual, a standard accessory.

Language TDS1000B/TDS2000B user manual part number

English 071-1817-XX

French 071-1818-XX

Italian 071-1819-XX

German 071-1820-XX

Spanish 071-1821-XX

Japanese 071-1822-XX

Portuguese 071-1823-XX

Simplified Chinese 071-1824-XX

Preface

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer ix

Traditional Chinese 071-1825-XX

Korean 071-1826-XX

Russian 071-1827-XX

TDS1000 and TDS2000 Series Manuals

For general operation, and information on the TDS2CMA Commu-

nications module, refer to the TDS1000 and TDS2000 Series Digital

Storage Oscilloscope User Manual, a standard accessory.

Language TDS1000/TDS2000 user manual part number

English 071-1064-XX

French 071-1065-XX

Italian 071-1066-XX

German 071-1067-XX

Spanish 071-1068-XX

Japanese 071-1069-XX

Portuguese 071-1070-XX

Simplified Chinese 071-1071-XX

Traditional Chinese 071-1072-XX

Korean 071-1073-XX

Russian 071-1074-XX

For information on the TDS2MEM Storage Memory and Commu-

nications module, refer to the TDS2MEM Storage Memory and

Communications Module User Manual (071--1262--XX), an optional

accessory that includes all eleven languages.

Preface

xTDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

TDS200 Series Manuals

For general operation, refer to the TDS200 Series Digital Real-Time

Oscilloscope User Manual, a standard accessory.

Language TDS200 series user manual part number

English 071-0398-XX

French 071-0400-XX

Italian 071-0401-XX

German 071-0402-XX

Spanish 071-0399-XX

Japanese 071-0405-XX

Portuguese 071-0403-XX

Simplified Chinese 071-0406-XX

Traditional Chinese 071-0407-XX

Korean 071-0408-XX

Russian 071-0404-XX

For information on the TDS2CMA Communications module, or

TDS2MM Math Measurements module, refer to the TDS200 Series

Extension Modules Instructions Manual (071-0409-XX), a standard

accessory for extension modules in English only.

Preface

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer xi

Service Manuals (English Only)

For information on how to service your oscilloscope, refer to the

appropriate manual from the following optional accessories:

HTPS2000 Series Digital Storage Oscilloscopes Service Manual

(071-1465-XX)

HTDS1000B and TDS2000B Series Digital Storage Oscilloscopes

Service Manual (071-1828-XX)

HTDS1000 and TDS2000 Series Digital Storage Oscilloscopes

Service Manual (071-1076-XX)

HTDS200 Series Digital Real-Time Oscilloscopes Service Manual

(071-0492-XX)

Conventions

Refer to the Command Syntax section of the Syntax and Commands

chapter (page 2--1) for information about command conventions.

This manual uses the following convention:

HReferences to the TDS2CMA Communications Extension

Module include the TDS2CM and TDS2CMAX modules.

HCommand descriptions list specific oscilloscopes series (and

module) when commands are valid for only those products

Preface

xii TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Getting Started

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 1-1

Getting Started

This manual contains information on how to remotely control and

operate your oscilloscope through communications protocol and

commands.

NOTE. For TDS1000B and TDS2000B series, you need to install the

PC Communications software from the CD that came with the

oscilloscope on a PC before you connect the oscilloscope USB

Device port to the PC. Refer to the TDS1000B and TDS2000B user

manual for installation information.

For all products, you need to connect an appropriate cable between

the communications port on your oscilloscope and your PC.

The next table describes where the communications port is located

on an extension module or oscilloscope, and the function of the port.

Table 1- 1: Communications ports and functions

Series Port location Port function

TDS200 TDS2CM, TDS2CMA, or TDS2CMAX

Communications, TDS2MM Math

RS-232, Centronics, GPIB

TDS1000/

TDS2000*

TDS2CMA or TDS2CMAX

TDS2MEM Storage Memory and

Communications

RS-232, Centronics, GPIB

RS-232, Centronics, CompactFlash

TDS1000B/

{

Back of oscilloscope USB Device

TDS2000B{

GPIB with a TEK-USB-488 adapter

TPS2000 Back of oscilloscope RS-232, Centronics

* TDS1001 and TDS2004 are not compatible with the TDS2MEM module.

{Install the PC Communications software from the CD that came with the

oscilloscope first; refer to your TDS1000B and TDS2000B user manual for

information on installing the software. After the software is installed, then

connect the oscilloscope to a PC.

Getting Started

1-2 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Refer to your oscilloscope user manual (Tektronix part numbers

listed on page v) for information on how to install, test, and

configure your oscilloscope and module.

NOTE. The firmware for the TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000

series oscilloscopes includes communications, math, and storage

memory functions.

Table 1- 2: Oscilloscope, extension module, and adapter compatibility

Series

TDS2CM,TDS2CMA

or TDS2CMAX TDS2MM TDS2MEM TEK-USB-488

TDS200 Yes Yes No No

TDS1000 or

TDS2000

Yes No Yes*No

TDS1000B or

TDS2000B

No No No Yes

TPS2000{No No No No

*TDS1001 and TDS2004 models are not compatible with the TDS2MEM module.

{RS-232 included in the oscilloscope firmware.

NOTE. If you use GPIB with the TDS1000B or TDS2000B series, you

can set a unique GPIB address for the oscilloscope through the

UTILITY "Options "GPIB Setup option.

Syntax and Commands

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-1

Command Syntax

You can control the oscilloscope through the GPIB, RS-232, or USB

interface using a large group of commands and queries.

This section describes the syntax these commands and queries use

and the conventions the oscilloscope uses to process them. The

commands and queries themselves are listed in the Command

Descriptions section.

Table 2- 1: Oscilloscope communication protocol

Model or option GPIB RS-232 USB

TDS2CM, TDS2CMA, TDS2CMAX Yes Yes No

TDS2MM Yes Yes No

TDS2MEM No Yes No

TDS1000 or TDS2000 Yes*Yes*{No

TDS1000B or TDS2000B Yes}No Yes

TPS2000 No Yes No

*Function available with a TDS2CM, TDS2CMA, or TDS2CMAX

module.

{Function available with a TDS2MEM module.

}Function available with a TEK-USB-488 adapter.

You transmit commands to the oscilloscope using the enhanced

American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII)

character encoding. Appendix A contains a chart of the ASCII

character set.

Command Syntax

2-2 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

The Backus Naur Form (BNF) notation is used in this manual to

describe commands and queries. Table 2--2 lists the BNF notation.

Table 2- 2: BNF notation

Symbol Meaning

<> Defined element

::= Is defined as

|Exclusive OR

{} Group; one element is required

[] Optional; can be omitted

... Previous element(s) may be

repeated

() Comment

Command and Query Structure

Commands consist of set commands and query commands (usually

simply called commands and queries). Commands change oscillo-

scope settings or perform a specific action. Queries cause the

oscilloscope to return data and information about its status.

Most commands have both a set form and a query form. The query

form of the command is the same as the set form except that it ends

with a question mark. For example, the set command ACQuire:MODe

has a query form ACQuire:MODe?. Not all commands have both a set

and a query form; some commands are set only and some are query

only.

A few commands do both a set and query action. For example, the

*CAL? command runs a self-calibration program on the oscilloscope,

then returns the result of the calibration.

A command message is a command or query name, followed by any

information the oscilloscope needs to execute the command or query.

Command messages consist of five different element types.

Command Syntax

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-3

Table 2--3 lists and describes the five element types.

Table 2- 3: Command message elements

Symbol Meaning

<Header> The basic command name. If the header ends with

a question mark, the command is a query. The

header may begin with a colon (:) character; if the

command is concatenated with other commands the

beginning colon is required. The beginning colon

can never be used with command headers

beginning with a star (*).

<Mnemonic> A header subfunction. Some command headers

have only one mnemonic. If a command header has

multiple mnemonics, they are always separated

from each other by a colon (:) character.

<Argument> A quantity, quality, restriction, or limit associated with

the header. Not all commands have an argument,

while other commands have multiple arguments.

Arguments are separated from the header by a

<Space>. Arguments are separated from each

other by a <Comma>.

<Comma>A single comma between arguments of multiple-ar-

gument commands. It may optionally have white

space characters before and after the comma.

<Space> A white space character between command header

and argument. It may optionally consist of multiple

white space characters.

Command Syntax

2-4 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Figure 2--1 shows the five command message elements.

Comma

SAVe:WAVEform CH1,REFA

Header

Mnemonics Arguments

Space

Figure 2- 1: Command message elements

Commands

Commands cause the oscilloscope to perform a specific function or

change one of its settings. Commands have the structure:

[:]<Header>[<Space><Argument>[<Comma><Argument>]...]

A command header is made up of one or more mnemonics arranged

in a hierarchical or tree structure. The first mnemonic is the base or

root of the tree and each subsequent mnemonic is a level or branch

off of the previous one. Commands at a higher level in the tree may

affect those at a lower level. The leading colon (:) always returns

you to the base of the command tree.

Queries

Queries cause the oscilloscope to return information about its status

or settings. Queries have the structure:

[:]<Header>?

[:]<Header>?[<Space><Argument>[<Comma><Argument>]...]

You can specify a query command at any level within the command

tree unless otherwise noted. These branch queries return information

about all the mnemonics below the specified branch or level.

Command Syntax

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-5

For example, MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNIts? returns the measure-

ment units, while MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe? returns the

measurement type selected for the measurement, and MEASUre-

ment:MEAS<x>? returns all the measurement parameters for the

specified measurement.

Headers in Query Responses

You can control whether the oscilloscope returns headers as part of

the query response. Use the HEADer command to control this feature.

If header is on, the oscilloscope returns command headers as part of

the query and formats the query response as a valid set command.

When header is off, the oscilloscope sends back only the values in

the response. This format can make it easier to parse and extract the

information from the response.

Table 2--4 shows the difference in responses.

Table 2- 4: Comparison of Header Off and Header On responses

Query Header Off response Header On response

ACQuire:NUMAVg? 64 :ACQUIRE:NUMAVG 64

CHx1:COUPling? DC :CH1:COUPLING DC

Clearing the Output Queue

To clear the output queue and reset the oscilloscope to accept a new

command or query, send a Device Clear (DCL) from a GPIB host.

From an RS-232 host, send a break signal. The RS-232 interface

responds by returning the ASCII string “DCL.”

From a USB host, send an INITIATE_CLEAR followed by a

CHECK_CLEAR_STATUS. The USB interface responds to

CHECK_CLEAR_STATUS with STATUS_SUCCESS when it is

finished clearing the output queue.

Command Syntax

2-6 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Command Entry

Follow these general rules when entering commands:

HEnter commands in upper or lower case.

HYou can precede any command with white space characters.

White space characters include any combination of the ASCII

control characters 00 through 09 and 0B through 20 hexadecimal

(0 through 9 and 11 through 32 decimal).

HThe oscilloscope ignores commands that consists of just a

combination of white space characters and line feeds.

Abbreviating Commands

You can abbreviate many oscilloscope commands. These abbrevia-

tions are shown in capital letters in the command listing in the

Command Groups sectiononpage2--15andCommand Descriptions

section on page 2--45. For example, the command ACQuire:NUMAvg

can be entered simply as ACQ:NUMA or acq:numa.

If you use the HEADer command to have command headers included

as part of query responses, you can also control whether the returned

headers are abbreviated or are full-length using the VERBose

command.

Concatenating Commands

You can concatenate any combination of set commands and queries

using a semicolon (;). The oscilloscope executes concatenated

commands in the order received. When concatenating commands

and queries you must follow these rules:

HCompletely different headers must be separated by both a

semicolon and by the beginning colon on all commands but the

first. For example, the commands TRIGger:MODe NORMal and

ACQuire:NUMAVg 16 can be concatenated into a single

command:

TRIGger:MODe NORMal;:ACQuire:NUMAVg 16

Command Syntax

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-7

HIf concatenated commands have headers that differ by only the

last mnemonic, you can abbreviate the second command and

eliminate the beginning colon. For example, the commands

ACQuire:MODe AVErage and ACQuire:NUMAVg 16 could be

concatenated into a single command:

ACQuire:MODe AVErage; NUMAVg 16

The longer version works equally well:

ACQuire:MODe AVErage;:ACQuire:NUMAVg 16

HNever precede a star (*) command with a colon or semicolon:

ACQuire:MODe AVErage;*TRG

The oscilloscope processes commands that follow the star

command as if the star command was not there, so:

ACQuire:MODe AVErage;*TRG;NUMAVg 16

sets the acquisition mode to average and sets acquisition

averaging to 16. The *TRG command is ignored.

HWhen you concatenate queries, the responses to all queries are

combined into a single response message. For example, if

channel 1 coupling is set to DC and the bandwidth is set to

20 MHz, the concatenated query:

CH1:COUPling?;BANdwidth?

returns :CH1:COUPLING DC;:CH1:BANDWIDTH ON if header is on,

or DC;ON if header is off.

HYou can concatenate set commands and queries in the same

message. For example:

ACQuire:MODe AVErage;NUMAVg?;STATE?

is a valid message that sets the acquisition mode to average,

queries the number of acquisitions for averaging, and then

queries the acquisition state. The oscilloscope executes

concatenated commands and queries in the order it receives

them.

Command Syntax

2-8 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

HAny query that returns arbitrary data, such as ID?, must be the

last query when part of a concatenated command. If the query is

not last, the oscilloscope generates event message 440.

Here are some INVALID concatenation examples:

HCH1:COUPling DC;ACQuire:NUMAVg 16

(missing colon before ACQuire)

HCH1:COUPling DC;:BANDwidth ON

(invalid colon before BANDwidth)

HCH1:COUPling DC;:*TRG

(invalid colon before a star (*) command)

HHORizontal:MAIn:POSition 0;MAIn:SCAle 1E–13

(levels of mnemonics are different—either remove the second

occurrence of MAIn:, or put :HORizontal: in front of

MAIN:SCAle)

Message Terminators

This manual uses the term <EOM> (End of message) to represent a

message terminator.

GPIB End of Message (EOM) Terminators. GPIB EOM terminators can

be the END message (EOI asserted concurrently with the last data

byte), the ASCII code for line feed (LF) sent as the last data byte, or

both. The oscilloscope always terminates messages with LF and EOI.

White space is allowed before the terminator; for example, CR LF is

acceptable.

USB End of Message (EOM) Terminators. The EOM bit must be set in

the USB header of the last transfer of a command message. See the

USB Test and Measurement Class Specification (USBTMC) section

3.2.1 for details. The oscilloscope terminates messages by setting

the EOM bit in the USB header of the last transfer of a message to

the host (USBTMC Specification section 3.3.1), and by terminating

messages with a LF. White space is allowed before the terminator;

for example, CR LF is acceptable.

Command Syntax

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-9

RS-232 End of Message Terminators. RS-232 EOM terminators can be a

CR (carriage return), LF (line feed), CRLF (carriage return followed

by a line feed), or LFCR (line feed followed by a carriage return).

When receiving, the oscilloscope accepts all four combinations as

valid input message terminators regardless of the currently selected

terminator. When a combination of multiple characters is selected

(CRLF or LFCR), the oscilloscope interprets the first character as the

terminator and the second character as a null command.

Constructed Mnemonics

Some header mnemonics specify one of a range of mnemonics. For

example, a channel mnemonic could be CH2. You can use these

mnemonics in the command just as you do any other mnemonic. For

example, there is a CH1:VOLts command and there is also a

CH2:VOLts command. In the command descriptions, this list of

choices is abbreviated CH<x>.

Channel Mnemonics

Commands specify the channel to use as a mnemonic in the header.

Symbol Meaning

CH<x> 2-channel models: A channel specifier; <x> is 1 or 2.

4-channel models: A channel specifier; <x> is 1, 2,

3, or 4.

Reference Waveform Mnemonics

Commands can specify the reference waveform to use as a

mnemonic in the header.

Symbol Meaning

REF<x> 2-channel models: A reference waveform specifier;

<x> is A or B.

4-channel models: A reference waveform specifier;

<x>isA,B,C,orD.

Command Syntax

2-10 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Waveform Mnemonics

In some commands you can specify a waveform without regard to its

type: channel waveform, math waveform, or reference waveform.

The “y” is the same as “x” in Reference Waveform Mnemonics.

Symbol Meaning

Cursor Position Mnemonic

When the oscilloscope displays cursors, commands may specify

which cursor of the pair to use.

Symbol Meaning

POSITION<x> A cursor selector; <x> is 1or 2.

Measurement Specifier Mnemonics

Commands can specify which measurement to set or query as a

mnemonic in the header. The oscilloscope can display up to four

(TDS200) or five (TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and

TPS2000) automated measurements.

Symbol Meaning

MEAS<x> A measurement specifier; <x> is 1--4 (TDS200)

or 1--5 (TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B,

TDS2000B, and TPS2000).

Command Syntax

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-11

Argument Types

A command argument can be in one of several forms. The individual

descriptions of each command tell which argument types to use with

that command.

Numeric Arguments

Many oscilloscope commands require numeric arguments. Table 2--5

lists the three types of numeric argument.

Table 2- 5: Types of numeric arguments

Symbol Meaning

<NR1> Signed integer value

<NR2> Floating point value without an exponent

<NR3> Floating point value with an exponent

The syntax shown is the data format that the oscilloscope returns in

response to a query. This format is also the preferred format when

sending a command to the oscilloscope.

When you enter an incorrect numeric argument, the oscilloscope

automatically forces the numeric argument to a correct value.

Table 2--6 lists how the oscilloscope handles incorrect numeric

arguments.

Command Syntax

2-12 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Table 2- 6: Oscilloscope handling of incorrect numeric arguments

Argument value Oscilloscope response

Numeric argument is

less than lowest correct

value for that command

Sets the specified command to the lowest correct

value and executes the command

Numeric argument is

greater than the highest

correct value for that

command

Sets the specified command to the highest correct

value and executes the command

Numeric value is be-

tween two correct values

Rounds the entered value to the nearest correct

value and executes the command

Quoted String Arguments

Some commands accept or return data in the form of a quoted string,

which is simply a group of ASCII characters enclosed by single

quotes (’) or double quotes (”). For example:

”this is a quoted string”

Symbol Meaning

<QString> Quoted string of ASCII text

Follow these rules when you use quoted strings:

1. A quoted string can include any character defined in the 7-bit

ASCII character set. Refer to Appendix A.

2. Use the same type of quote character to open and close the string:

”this is a valid string”

3. You can mix quotation marks within a string as long as you

follow the previous rule:

”this is an ’acceptable’ string”

Command Syntax

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-13

4. You can include a quote character within a string simply by

repeating the quote. For example,

”here is a ”” mark”

5. Strings can have upper or lower case characters.

6. If you use a GPIB network, you cannot terminate a quoted string

with the END message before the closing delimiter.

7. A carriage return or line feed embedded in a quoted string does

not terminate the string, but is treated as just another character in

the string.

8. The maximum length of a quoted string returned from a query is

1000 characters.

Here are some examples of invalid strings:

”Invalid string argument’

(quotes are not of the same type)

”test<EOI>”

(termination character is embedded in the string)

Block Arguments

Several oscilloscope commands use a block argument form.

Table 2--7 lists and describes each part of a block argument.

Table 2- 7: Parts of a block argument

Symbol Meaning

<NZDig> A non-zero digit character, in the range 1–9

Specifies the number of <Dig> elements that follow

<Dig> A digit character, in the range 0–9

<DChar> A character with the hex equivalent of 00 through FF hexadecimal

(0 through 255 decimal)

<Block> A block of data bytes, defined as:

<Block> ::=

{ #<NZDig><Dig>[<Dig>...][<DChar>...]

| #0[<DChar>...]<terminator> }

Command Syntax

2-14 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Figure 2--2 shows an example of a block argument.

*DDT #217ACQuire:STATE RUN

Block header

Specifies number of

length digits that follow

Specifies data length

Block argument

Figure 2- 2: Block Argument example

<NZDig> specifies the number of <Dig> elements that follow. Taken

together, the <Dig> elements form a decimal integer that specifies

how many <DChar> elements follow.

#0 means that the <Block> is an indefinite length block. The

<terminator> ends the block. You should not use indefinite length

blocks with RS-232, because there is no way to include a <termina-

tor> character as a <DChar> character.

Thefirstoccurrenceofa<terminator> character signals the end of

the block and any subsequent <DChar> characters will be interpreted

as a syntax error. With the GPIB, the EOI line signals the last byte.

With the USB, the EOM bit signals the last byte.

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-15

Command Groups

This section lists the commands organized by functional group. The

Command Descriptions section, starting on page 2--45, lists all

commands alphabetically.

The oscilloscope GPIB, USB, and RS-232 interfaces conform to

Tektronix standard codes and formats except where noted. The GPIB

interface also conforms to IEEE Std 488.2–1987 except where noted.

The USB interface also conforms to USB Test and Measurement

Class, Subclass USB488 Specification, except where noted.

Acquisition Commands

Acquisition commands affect the acquisition of waveforms. These

commands control mode, averaging, and single-waveform

acquisition. Table 2--8 lists and describes Acquisition commands.

Table 2- 8: Acquisition commands

Header Description

ACQuire? Return acquisition parameters

ACQuire:MODe Set or query the acquisition mode

ACQuire:NUMACq? Return the # of acquisitions obtained

ACQuire:NUMAVg Set or query the number of acquisitions

for average

ACQuire:STATE Start or stop the acquisition system

ACQuire:STOPAfter Set or query the acquisition control

Command Groups

2-16 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Calibration and Diagnostic Commands

Calibration and Diagnostic commands let you initiate the oscillo-

scope self-calibration routines and examine the results of diagnostic

tests. Table 2--9 lists and describes Calibration and Diagnostic

commands.

Table 2- 9: Calibration and Diagnostic commands

Header Description

*CAL? Perform an internal self-calibration and

return result status

CALibrate:ABOrt Stop an in-progress factory calibration

CALibrate:CONTINUE Perform the next step in the factory

calibration sequence

CALibrate:FACtory Initialize the factory calibration sequence

CALibrate:INTERNAL Perform an internal self-calibration

CALibrate:STATUS? Return PASS or FAIL status of the last

self- or factory-calibration operation

DIAg:RESUlt:FLAG? Return diagnostic tests status

DIAg:RESUlt:LOG? Return diagnostic test sequence results

ERRLOG:FIRST? Returns first entry from error log

ERRLOG:NEXT? Returns next entry from error log

Command Groups

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-17

Cursor Commands

Cursor commands provide control over the oscilloscope cursor

display and readout. Table 2--10 lists and describes Cursor com-

mands.

Table 2- 10: Cursor commands

Header Description

CURSor? Return cursor settings

CURSor:FUNCtion Set or query the cursors on or off; select

cursor type

CURSor:HBArs? Return horizontal bar settings

CURSor:HBArs:DELTa? Return vertical distance between

horizontal bar cursors

CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x> Set or query the position of a horizontal

bar cursor

CURSor:HBArs:UNIts? Query vertical scale units

CURSor:SELect:SOUrce Select waveform

CURSor:VBArs? Return vertical bar settings

CURSor:VBArs:DELTa? Return horizontal distance between

cursors

CURSor:VBArs:HDELTa?

(TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and

TPS2000 only)

Return horizontal distance between

cursors. Same as CURSor:VBArs:DEL-

Ta?

CURSor:VBArs:HPOS<x>?

(TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and

TPS2000 only)

Return the amplitude of the waveform at

the cursor position

CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x> Set or query the position of a vertical bar

cursor

CURSor:VBArs:SLOPE?

(TPS2000 with Power Analysis

Module only)

Return the value of the on-screen dV/dt

or dI/dt measurement

Command Groups

2-18 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Table 2- 10: Cursor commands (Cont.)

Header Description

CURSor:VBArs:UNIts Set or query the vertical cursors to time

or frequency

CURSor:VBArs:VDELTa?

(TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and

TPS2000 only)

Return the vertical distance between

cursors

Display Commands

Display commands let you change the graticule style, displayed

contrast, and alter other display attributes. Table 2--11 lists and

describes Display commands.

Table 2- 11: Display commands

Header Description

DISplay? Return display settings

DISplay:BRIGHTness

(TPS2000 only)

Set or query the LCD display brightness

DISplay:CONTRast Set or query the LCD display contrast

DISplay:FORMat Set or query the YT or XY display

DISplay:INVert

(not available on the TDS200,

accepted as a legal command on

theTDS2000B and TPS2000 but

has no effect on these models)

Set or query the normal or inverted

monochrome display

DISplay:PERSistence Set or query the accumulate time

DISplay:STYle Set or query the waveform display style

Command Groups

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-19

File System Commands

(TDS2MEM Module, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Only)

File system commands perform file management tasks on the

CompactFlash (CF) card of TPS2000 oscilloscopes, and TDS models

with a TDS2MEM module; and on USB flash drives of TDS1000B

and TDS2000B oscilloscopes. Table 2--12 lists these commands.

Table 2- 12: File System commands

Header Description

FILESystem? Return the current working directory (CWD) and

CF card or USB flash drive free space values

FILESystem:CWD Set or query the current CF card or USB flash

drive directory

FILESystem:DELEte Delete specified file on the CF card or USB flash

drive

FILESystem:DIR? Return a list of files in current CF card or USB

flash drive directory

FILESystem:FORMat Format the CF card or USB flash drive

FILESystem:FREESpace? Return free space on the CF card or USB flash

drive

FILESystem:MKDir Create a new directory on the CF card or USB

flash drive

FILESystem:REName Assign new name to specified file on the CF

card or USB flash drive

FILESystem:RMDir Delete specified directory

Command Groups

2-20 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

File System Conventions

Use the following conventions when specifying file paths and file

names::

HThe default folder (directory) is A:\.

HFile and folder names have a maximum of 11 characters; eight

characters,followedbyaperiod,followedbyuptothree

characters. This format is referred to as 8.3 naming.

HWild card characters (*, %, ?) are not valid characters in file or

path names.

HLists the Windows-generated short file and folder names for long

file or folder names created on PC Windows operating systems.

Hard Copy Commands

The hard copy commands let you control the format of hard copy

output, and the starting and stopping of hard copies. Table 2--13 lists

and describes Hard Copy commands. :

NOTE. TDS1000B and TDS2000B oscilloscopes include PictBridge

commands to provide additional control of the hard copy format.

Refer to page 2--27 for information on the PictBridge commands.

Table 2- 13: Hard Copy commands

Header Description

HARDCopy Start or terminate hard copy

HARDCopy:BUTTON

(TDS2MEM, TDS1000B,

TDS2000B, and TPS2000 only)

Set or query the hard copy button

function

For TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and

TPS2000, set or query the PRINT button

HARDCopy:FORMat Set or query the hard copy output format

Command Groups

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-21

Table 2- 13: Hard Copy commands (Cont.)

Header Description

HARDCopy:INKSaver

(TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS2000B,

and TPS2000 only)

Set or query the hard copy ink saver

option

HARDCopy:LAYout Set or query the hard copy orientation

HARDCopy:PORT Set or query the hard copy port for

output: RS232, GPIB, Centronics, or

USB

Horizontal Commands

Horizontal commands control the time bases of the oscilloscope. You

can set the position and time per division of both the main and

window time bases. You can substitute SECdiv for SCAle in all

appropriate horizontal commands. This provides program compati-

bility with previous Tektronix digitizing oscilloscopes. Table 2--14

lists and describes Horizontal commands.

Table 2- 14: Horizontal commands

Header Description

HORizontal? Return horizontal settings

HORizontal:DELay? Return all settings for the window time

base

HORizontal:DELay:POSition Position window

HORizontal:DELay:SCAle Set or query the window time base

time/division

HORizontal:DELay:SECdiv Same as HORizontal:DELay:SCAle

HORizontal:MAIn? Return the main time base time/division

HORizontal:MAIn:POSition Set or query the main time base trigger

point

Command Groups

2-22 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Table 2- 14: Horizontal commands (Cont.)

Header Description

HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle Set or query the main time base time/di-

vision

HORizontal:MAIn:SECdiv Same as HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle

HORizontal:POSition Set or query the position of waveform to

display

HORizontal:RECOrdlength Return waveform record length

HORizontal:SCAle Same as HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle

HORizontal:SECdiv Same as HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle

HORizontal:VIEW Select view

Math Commands

Math commands provide math function definition. Table 2--15 lists

and describes Math commands.

Table 2- 15: Math commands

Header Description

MATH? Query the definition for the

math waveform

MATH:DEFINE Set or query the math wave-

form definition

MATH:FFT? Return all math FFT param-

eters

MATH:FFT:HORizontal:POSition

(TDS200 with a TDS2MM module, TDS1000,

TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and

TPS2000 only)

Set or query the FFT hori-

zontal display position

Command Groups

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-23

Table 2- 15: Math commands (Cont.)

Header Description

MATH:FFT:HORizontal:SCAle

(TDS200 with a TDS2MM module, TDS1000,

TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and

TPS2000 only)

Set or query the FFT hori-

zontal zoom factor

MATH:FFT:VERtical:POSition

(TDS200 with a TDS2MM module, TDS1000,

TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and

TPS2000 only)

Set or query the FFT vertical

display position

MATH:FFT:VERtical:SCAle

(TDS200 with a TDS2MM module, TDS1000,

TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and

TPS2000 only)

Set or query the FFT vertical

zoom factor

MATH:VERtical? Return all math vertical

waveform parameters

MATH:VERtical:POSition

(TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 only)

Set or query the math wave-

form display position

MATH:VERtical:SCAle

(TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 only)

Set or query the math wave-

form display scale

Measurement Commands

Measurement commands control the automated measurement

system. The oscilloscope can display up to four (TDS200) or five

(TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000)

automated measurements. In the commands, these measurement

readouts are named MEAS<x>, where <x> can be 1, 2, 3, or 4 (or 5

for TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000).

The best method for taking measurements over the computer

interface is to use the MEASUREMENT:IMMED commands and

queries. The immediate measurement has no front-panel equivalent,

and the oscilloscope never displays immediate measurements.

Command Groups

2-24 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Because they are computed only when they are requested, immediate

measurements slow the waveform update rate less than displayed

measurements.

Use the VALue? query to obtain measurement results of either

displayed or immediate measurements.

Several measurement commands set and query measurement

parameters. You can assign some parameters, such as waveform

sources, differently for each measurement readout.

Table 2--16 lists and describes Measurement commands.

Table 2- 16: Measurement commands

Header Description

MEASUrement? Return all measurement parameters

MEASUrement:IMMed? Return immediate measurement param-

eters

MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce1 Set or query the channel for immediate

measurement

MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce2 Set or query the channel for two-source

immediate measurements (TPS2000

with Power Analysis Module only)

MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe Set or query the immediate measure-

ment to be taken

MEASUrement:IMMed:UNIts? Return the immediate measurement

units

MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue? Return the immediate measurement

result

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>? Return parameters on the periodic

measurement

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOUrce Set or query the channel to take the

periodic measurement from

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe Set or query the type of periodic mea-

surement to be taken

Command Groups

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-25

Table 2- 16: Measurement commands (Cont.)

Header Description

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNIts? Return the units for periodic measure-

ment

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VALue? Return periodic measurement results

Miscellaneous Commands

Miscellaneous commands are a group of commands that do not fit

into any other category.

Several commands and queries are common to all 488.2–1987

devices on the GPIB or USB bus, and the device on the RS-232

interface. These commands and queries are defined by IEEE Std.

488.2–1987 and Tektronix Standard Codes and Formats 1989 and

begin with an asterisk (*) character. Table 2--17 lists and describes

Miscellaneous commands.

Table 2- 17: Miscellaneous commands

Header Description

AUTORange?

(TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and

TPS2000 only)

Return all autorange parameters

AUTORange:SETTings

(TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and

TPS2000 only)

Set or query the which parameters

autorange can adjust

AUTORange:STATE

(TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and

TPS2000 only)

Set or query the autorange to on or off

AUTOSet Automatic oscilloscope setup

AUTOSet: ENABLE

(TDS1000B and TDS2000B only)

Allows educators to disable or enable the

Autorange and Autoset functions.*

Command Groups

2-26 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Table 2- 17: Miscellaneous commands (Cont.)

Header Description

AUTOSet:SIGNAL?

(TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B,

TDS2000B, and TPS2000 only)

Return the type of signal found by

autoset

AUTOSet:VIEW

(TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B,

TDS2000B, and TPS2000 only)

Set or query the Autoset view

DATE

(TDS2MEM, TDS1000B,

TDS2000B, and TPS2000 only)

Set or query the date value

*DDT Set or query the group execute trigger

(GET)

FACtory Reset to factory default

HDR Same as HEADer

HEADer Set or query the command header

ID? Return identification information

*IDN? Return identification information

LANGUAGE Set or query the language for display

messages

LOCk Lock front panel (local lockout)

*LRN? Query device settings

REM No action; remark only

*RST Reset

SET? Same as *LRN?

TIME

(TDS2MEM, TDS1000B,

TDS2000B, and TPS2000 only)

Set or query the time value

*TRG Perform Group Execute Trigger (GET)

*TST? Return self-test results

Command Groups

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-27

Table 2- 17: Miscellaneous commands (Cont.)

Header Description

UNLock Unlock front panel (local lockout)

VERBose Return full command name or minimum

spellings with query

*AUTOSet: ENABLE can be manually set from the Service Diag

menu. To access the service diagnostics menu, refer to the

TDS1000B and TDS2000B series service manual.

PictBridge Commands (TDS1000B and TDS2000B Only)

The PictBridge commands let you control the format of the hard

copy on the PictBridge compatible printer. Table 2--13 lists and

describes PictBridge commands. :

NOTE. The HARDCopy:BUTTON, HARDCopy:INKSaver, and

HARDCopy:LAYOUT commands apply to the TDS1000B and

TDS2000B oscilloscopes. Refer to page 2--20 for more information.

Table 2- 18: PictBridge commands

Header Description

PICTBridge:DEF Set the next six options to default

PICTBridge:PAPERSIZE Set or query the paper size

PICTBridge:IMAGESIZE Set or query the image size

PICTBridge:PAPERTYPE Set or query the paper type

PICTBridge:PRINTQUAL Set or query the print quality

PICTBridge:DATEPRINT Set or query the date print

PICTBridge:IDPRINT Set or query the ID print

Command Groups

2-28 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Power and Battery-Related Commands (TPS2000 Only)

Power and Battery-Related commands provide battery management

functions to a TPS2000 oscilloscope.

Table 2--19 lists and describes the Power and Battery-Related

commands.

Table 2- 19: Power and Battery-Related commands (TPS2000 only)

Header Description

POWer? Return all power parameters

POWer:AC:PRESENt? Return whether the oscilloscope is being

POWer:BATTERY<x>:GASgauge? Return the charge remaining in battery x

POWer:BATTERY<x>:STATUS? Return status for battery x

POWer:BATTERIES:TIME? Return the time remaining in both

batteries

POWer:BUTTONLIGHT Turn the lighted front-panel buttons on

and off

Power Measurement (TPS2000 with TPS2PWR1 Power

Analysis Application Key Installed Only)

Power Measurement commands provide power measurements to a

TPS2000 oscilloscope with the TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis

application software key installed.

Table 2--20 lists and describes Power Measurement commands.

Command Groups

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-29

Table 2- 20: Power Measurement commands (TPS2000 with TPS2PWR1

only)

Header Description

HARmonics? Return all harmonic parameters

HARmonics:ENABle Set or query the harmonics menu on and off

HARmonics:FREquency? Return the frequency of the selected harmonic

HARmonics:HRMS? Return the frequency of the selected harmonic

HARmonics:PERCent? Return the amplitude of the selected harmonic as a

percent of the fundamental

HARmonics:PHAse? Return the phase of the selected harmonic, in

degrees, relative to the fundamental

HARmonics:RMS? Return the amplitude of the harmonics source in

RMS units. This may be Vrms or Irms depending on

the type of source waveform

HARmonics:SAVe Set the file name and path to save harmonic data

HARmonics:SELect Set or query the selected harmonic

HARmonics:SETUp Set or query the operating mode for harmonics

measurements commands

HARmonics:SHOW Set or query the specified harmonics

HARmonics:SOUrce Set or query the source in the harmonics menu

HARmonics:THDF? Query the total harmonic distortion of the waveform

as percent of fundamental

HARmonics:THDR? Query the total harmonic distortion of the waveform

as % of input Vrms

POWerANALYSIS:SOUrces Sets or query the power analysis sources

SWLoss? Return switching loss measurement settings

SWLoss:ACQuire Set or query the type of acquisition to use for

Switching Loss commands

SWLoss:AVErage:CONDUCTION? Return the power loss of the device under test when

the device is conducting

Command Groups

2-30 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Table 2- 20: Power Measurement commands (TPS2000 with TPS2PWR1

only) (Cont.)

Header Description

SWLoss:AVErage:N? Return the number of measurements used to

calculate the averaged value for switching loss

commands

SWLoss:AVErage:TOTAL? Return the sum of the turn-on, turn-off, and

conduction switching losses for an Average

measurement

SWLoss:AVErage:TURNOFF? Return the power loss of the device under test when

the device is transitioning from on to off

SWLoss:AVErage:TURNON? Return the power loss of the device under test when

the device is transitioning from off to on

SWLoss:ENABLe Set or query switching loss measurements on or off

SWLoss:LEVELS Return oscilloscope Switching Loss Measurement

settings to factory default (SWLoss:TONSTART,

SWLoss:TONEND, SWLoss:TOFFSTART,

SWLoss:TOFFEND only)

SWLoss:LOG:CONDUCTION? Return the Conduction Loss for a switching loss

measurement

SWLoss:LOG:INDEX Set or query which measurement to return for a

SWLoss:LOG command

SWLoss:LOG:TOTAL? Return the Total Loss for a switching loss measure-

ment

SWLoss:LOG:TURNOFF? Return the Turn-Off Loss for a switching loss

measurement

SWLoss:LOG:TURNON? Return the Turn-On Loss for a switching loss

measurement

SWLoss:SAVE Saves the Switching Loss Measurements

SWLoss:SOURCES Set or query the input sources for Switching Loss

Measurements

SWLoss:STOPAfter Set or query the number of acquisitions used for

Switching Loss Measurements

Command Groups

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-31

Table 2- 20: Power Measurement commands (TPS2000 with TPS2PWR1

only) (Cont.)

Header Description

SWLoss:TOFFEND Set or query a level on the first falling edge of the

current waveform that occurs after the turn-off starts

SWLoss:TONEND Set or query a level on the first rising edge of the

voltage waveform that occurs after the first falling

edge

SWLoss:TOFFSTART Set or query a level on the falling edge of the voltage

waveform that defines where the beginning of the

switching loss measurement ends

SWLoss:TONSTART Set or query a level on the falling edge of the voltage

waveform that defines where the switching loss

measurement begins

SWLoss:UNIts Set or query the units for Switching Loss Measure-

ment

SWLoss:VALue:CONDUCTION? Return the power loss of the device under test when

the device is conducting in its on state

SWLoss:VALue:TOTAL? Return the sum of the turn-on, turn-off, and

conduction switching losses

SWLoss:VALue:TURNOFF? Return the power loss of the device under test when

the device is transitioning between its on and off

state

SWLoss:VALue:TURNON? Return the power loss of the device under test when

the device is transitioning between its off and on

state display

SWLoss:VSAT Set or query the saturation voltage for the device

under test

WAVEFORMANALYSIS:SOUrce Set or query the source for Waveform Analysis

commands

Command Groups

2-32 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

RS-232 Commands

(TDS200, TDS1000, TDS2000, and TPS2000 Only)

RS-232 commands allow you to set or query the parameters that

control the RS-232 port. Table 2--21 lists and describes RS-232

commands.

Table 2- 21: RS-232 commands

Header Description

RS232? Query RS232 parameters

RS232:BAUd Set or query the baud rate

RS232:HARDFlagging Set or query the hard flagging

RS232:PARity Set or query the parity type

RS232:SOFTFlagging Set or query the soft flagging

RS232:TRANsmit:TERMinator Set or query the end-of-line terminator

Refer to Table 2--1 on page 2--1 for a list of products that are

compatible with RS-232.

Save and Recall Commands

Save and Recall commands allow you to store and retrieve internal

waveforms and settings. When you “save a setting,” you save most

of the settings of the oscilloscope. When you then “recall a setting,”

the oscilloscope restores itself to the state it was in when you saved

that setting.

To display a saved waveform, use the SELect:<wfm> command

described on page 2--197. Table 2--22 lists and describes Save and

Recall commands.

Command Groups

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-33

Table 2- 22: Save and Recall commands

Header Description

*RCL Recall setting

RECAll:SETUp Recall saved oscilloscope setting

RECAll:WAVEform Recall saved waveform

*SAV Save oscilloscope setting

SAVe:IMAge

(TDS2MEM, TDS1000B,

TDS2000B, and TPS2000 only)

Save screen image to file

SAVe:IMAge:FILEFormat

(TDS2MEM, TDS1000B,

TDS2000B, and TPS2000 only)

Set screen image file format

SAVe:SETUp Save oscilloscope setting

SAVe:WAVEform Save waveform

Status and Error Commands

Status and error commands let you determine the status of the

oscilloscope and control events.

Several commands and queries are common to all devices on the

GPIB or USB bus. These commands and queries are defined by

IEEE Std. 488.2–1987 and Tek Standard Codes and Formats 1989,

and begin with an asterisk (*) character. Table 2--23 lists and

describes Status and Error commands.

Table 2- 23: Status and Error commands

Header Description

ALLEv? Return all events

BUSY? Return oscilloscope busy status

*CLS Clear status

Command Groups

2-34 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Table 2- 23: Status and Error commands (Cont.)

Header Description

DESE Set or query the device event status enable

*ESE Set or query the standard event status enable

*ESR? Return standard event status register; this is the usual

way to determine whether a set command executed

without error

EVENT? Return event code

EVMsg? Return event message

EVQty? Return number of events in queue

*OPC Set or query the operation complete

*PSC Set or query the power-on status clear

*SRE Set or query the service request enable

*STB? Read status byte

*WAI Wait to continue

Trigger Commands

Trigger commands control all aspects of oscilloscope triggering.

The three types of triggers are edge, pulse width, and video. Edge

triggering is the default type. Edge triggering lets you acquire a

waveform when the signal passes through a voltage level of your

choosing. Pulse width triggering lets you trigger on normal or

aberrant pulses. Video triggering adds the capability of triggering on

video fields and lines. Table 2--24 lists and describes Trigger

commands.

Command Groups

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-35

Table 2- 24: Trigger commands

Header Description

TRIGger Force trigger event

TRIGger:MAIn Set main trigger level to 50%; Query

returns main trigger settings

TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE? Return edge trigger settings

TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:COUPling Set or query the edge trigger cou-

pling

TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SLOpe Set or query the edge trigger slope

TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SOUrce Set or query the edge trigger source

TRIGger:MAIn:FREQuency?

(TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B,

TDS2000B, and TPS2000 only)

Return trigger frequency value

TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff? Return trigger holdoff value

TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:VALue Set or query the trigger holdoff value

TRIGger:MAIn:LEVel Set or query the trigger level

TRIGger:MAIn:MODe Set or query the trigger mode

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse?

(TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B,

TDS2000B, and TPS2000 only)

Return pulse trigger settings

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SOUrce

(TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B,

TDS2000B, and TPS2000 only)

Set or query the pulse trigger source

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth?

(TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B,

TDS2000B, and TPS2000 only)

Return pulse trigger width parame-

ters

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:POLarity

(TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B,

TDS2000B, and TPS2000 only)

Set or query the pulse trigger polarity

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:WHEN Set or query the pulse trigger when

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:WIDth Set or query the pulse trigger width

Command Groups

2-36 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Table 2- 24: Trigger commands (Cont.)

Header Description

TRIGger:MAIn:TYPe Set or query the main trigger type

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo? Query video trigger parameters

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:LINE

(TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B,

TDS2000B, and TPS2000 only)

Set or query the video trigger line

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:POLarity Set or query the video trigger polarity

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SOUrce Set or query the video trigger source

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:STANdard

(TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B,

TDS2000B, and TPS2000 only)

Set or query the video trigger

standard

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SYNC Set or query the video trigger sync

TRIGger:STATE? Return trigger system status

Vertical Commands

Vertical commands control the attributes of the channels. The

SELect:<wfm> command also displays a specified waveform or

removes it from the display. Table 2--25 lists and describes Vertical

commands.

Table 2- 25: Vertical commands

Header Description

CH<x>? Return vertical parameters

CH<x>:BANdwidth Set or query the channel bandwidth

CH<x>:COUPling Set or query the channel coupling

CH<x>:CURRENTPRObe

(TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and

TPS2000 only)

Set or query the scale settings for current

probes

Command Groups

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-37

Table 2- 25: Vertical commands (Cont.)

Header Description

CH<x>:INVert

(All oscilloscope, firmware version,

and module combinations except

TDS210 and TDS220 with firmware

below V 2.00 and a TDS2CMA

communications module.)

Set or query the channel invert

CH<x>:POSition Set or query the channel position

CH<x>:PRObe Set or query the channel probe parame-

ters

CH<x>:SCAle Set or query the channel volts/div

CH<x>:VOLts Same as CH<x>:SCAle

CH<x>:YUNit

(TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and

TPS2000 only)

Set or query the units of the specified

channel

SELect? Controls the display of waveforms

SELect:<wfm> Set or query the waveform display state

Waveform Commands

Waveform commands let you transfer waveform data points to and

from the oscilloscope. Waveform data points are a collection of

values that define a waveform. One data value usually represents one

data point in the waveform record. When working with peak-detect

waveforms, each data value is either the min or max of a min/max

pair. Before you can transfer waveform data, you must specify the

data format and waveform locations.

Table 2--26 lists and describes Waveform commands. Refer to the

text following this table for more information about waveform

commands.

Command Groups

2-38 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Table 2- 26: Waveform commands

Header Description

CURVe Transfer waveform data to or from the

oscilloscope

DATa Set or query the waveform data format and

location

DATa:DESTination Set or query the destination for waveforms

sent to the oscilloscope

DATa:ENCdg Set or query the waveform data encoding

method

DATa:SOUrce Set or query the source of CURVe? data

DATa:STARt Set or query the starting point in waveform

transfer

DATa:STOP Set or query the ending point in waveform

transfer

DATa:TARget Same as DATa:DESTination

DATa:WIDth Set or query the byte width of waveform

points

WAVFrm? Return waveform preamble and curve data

WFMPre? Return waveform preamble

WFMPre:BIT_Nr Set or query the preamble bit width of

waveform points

WFMPre:BN_Fmt Set or query the preamble binary encoding

type

WFMPre:BYT_Nr Set or query the preamble byte width of

waveform points

WFMPre:BYT_Or Set or query the preamble byte order of

waveform points

WFMPre:ENCdg Set or query the preamble encoding

method

Command Groups

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-39

Table 2- 26: Waveform commands (Cont.)

Header Description

WFMPre:NR_Pt Query the number of points in the curve

transfer

WFMPre:PT_Fmt Set or query the format of curve points

WFMPre:PT_Off Query the trigger offset

WFMPre:WFId? Query the waveform identifier

WFMPre:XINcr Set or query the horizontal sampling

interval

WFMPre:XUNit Set or query the horizontal units

WFMPre:XZEro Set or query the time of first point in

waveform

WFMPre:YMUlt Set or query the vertical scale factor

WFMPre:YOFf Set or query the vertical offset

WFMPre:YUNit Set or query the vertical units

WFMPre:YZEro?

(TDS200 with TDS2MM module,

TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B,

TDS2000B, and TPS2000 only)

Set or query the waveform conversion

factor

WFMPre:<wfm>? Return waveform formatting data

WFMPre:<wfm>:NR_Pt?_Fmt Return the number of points in the

transmitted waveform record

WFMPre:<wfm>:PT_Fmt Set or query the format of curve points

WFMPre:<wfm>:PT_Off? Query the trigger offset

WFMPre:<wfm>:WFId? Query the waveform identifier

WFMPre:<wfm>:XINcr Set or query the horizontal sampling

interval

WFMPre:<wfm>:XUNit Set or query the horizontal units

WFMPre:<wfm>:XZEro Set or query the time of first data point in

waveform

Command Groups

2-40 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Table 2- 26: Waveform commands (Cont.)

Header Description

WFMPre:<wfm>:YMUlt Set or query the vertical scale factor

WFMPre:<wfm>:YOFf Set or query the vertical position

WFMPre:<wfm>:YUNit Set or query the vertical units

WFMPre:<wfm>:YZEro?

(TDS200 with TDS2MM module,

TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B,

TDS2000B, and TPS2000 only)

Set or query the waveform conversion

factor

Waveform Data Formats

Internally, the oscilloscope uses one 8-bit data byte to represent each

waveform data point, regardless of the acquisition mode.

The DATa:WIDth command lets you specify the number of bytes per

data point when transferring data to and from an oscilloscope. This

provides compatibility with other digitizing oscilloscopes.

When DATa:WIDth is set to two:

HIf sending data, the oscilloscope multiplies each point by 256; the

most significant byte then has meaningful data and the least

significant byte is 0

HIf receiving data, the oscilloscope truncates the data (divides by

256) and saves the most significant byte

NOTE. The oscilloscopes uses these methods to handle waveforms

transmitted in ASCII or binary format.

Command Groups

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-41

The oscilloscope can transfer waveform data in either ASCII or

binary format. Use the DATa:ENCdg command to specify one of the

following formats:

HASCII data is represented by signed integer values. The range of

values depends on the byte width specified. One-byte-wide data

ranges from –128 to 127. Two-byte-wide data ranges from

–32768 to 32767.

Each data value requires two to seven characters. This includes

one character for the minus sign if the value is negative, one to

five ASCII characters for the waveform value, and a comma to

separate data points.

An example of an ASCII waveform data string follows:

CURVE<space>–110,–109,–110,–110,–109,–107,–109,–107,

–106,–105,–103,–100,–97,–90,–84,–80

HBinary data can be represented by signed integer or positive

integer values. The range of the values depends on the byte width

specified.

Table 2--27 lists the ranges for one- and two-byte-wide data.

Table 2- 27: Binary data ranges

Byte width Signed integer range Positive integer range

1–128 to 127 0to255

2–32,768 to 32,767 0 to 65,535

The defined binary formats also specify the order in which the bytes

are transferred giving a total of four binary formats: RIBinary,

RPBinary, SRIbinary, and SRPbinary.

Command Groups

2-42 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

RIBinary is signed integer where the most significant byte is

transferred first, and RPBinary is positive integer where the most

significant byte is transferred first. SRIbinary and SRPbinary

correspond to RIBinary and RPBinary respectively but use a

swapped byte order where the least significant byte is transferred

first. The byte order is ignored when DATa:WIDth is set to 1.

Waveform Data Record

You can transfer multiple points for each waveform record. You can

transfer a portion of the waveform or you can transfer the entire

record. The DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP commands let you

specify the first and last data points of the waveform record.

When transferring data into the oscilloscope you must specify the

location of the first data point within the waveform record. For

example, when DATa:STARt is set to 1, data points will be stored

starting with the first point in the record, and when DATa:STARt is

set to 500, data will be stored starting at the 500th point in the record.

The oscilloscope ignores DATa:STOP when reading in data as the

oscilloscope will stop reading data when there is no more data to

read or when it has reached 2500 data points.

You must specify the first and last data points in the waveform

record when transferring data from the oscilloscope to an external

device. Setting DATa:STARt to 1 and DATa:STOP to 2500 always

sends the entire waveform, regardless of the acquisition mode.

Waveform Data Locations and Memory Allocation

The DATa:SOUrce command specifies the location of the data when

transferring waveforms from the oscilloscope. You can transfer one

waveform at a time.

You can transfer only one waveform into the oscilloscope at a time.

Each waveform is stored in one of two stored waveform locations for

2-channel models or one of four stored waveform locations for

4-channel models. You specify the stored waveform location with

the DATa:DESTination command.

Command Groups

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-43

NOTE. The oscilloscope stores waveforms that are ≤2500 data points

long. The oscilloscope truncates waveforms longer than 2500 data

points.

Waveform Preamble

Each waveform that is transferred has an associated waveform

preamble that contains information such as the horizontal scale,

vertical scale, and other settings in place when the waveform was

created. Refer to the WFMPre commands on page 2--244 for more

information about the waveform preamble.

Scaling Waveform Data

Once you transfer the waveform data to the controller, you can

convert the data points into voltage values for analysis using

information from the waveform preamble.

Transferring Waveform Data

Data transfer times depend on data format, data width, and the speed

of the controller. Refer to Programming Examples on page 4--1.

From the Oscilloscope. To transfer waveforms from the oscilloscope to

an external controller, follow these steps:

1. Use the DATa:SOUrce command to select the waveform source.

2. Use the DATa:ENCdg command to specify the waveform data

format.

3. Use the DATa:WIDth command to specify the number of bytes

per data point.

4. Use the DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP commands to specify the

portion of the waveform that you want to transfer.

5. Use the WFMPRe? command to transfer waveform preamble

information.

6. Use the CURVe? command to transfer waveform data.

Command Groups

2-44 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

To the Oscilloscope. To transfer waveform data to an oscilloscope

waveform storage location, follow these steps:

1. Use the DATa:DESTination command to specify the stored

waveform location.

2. Use the DATa:ENCdg command to specify the waveform data

format.

3. Use the DATa:WIDth command to specify the number of bytes

per data point.

4. Use the DATa:STARt command to specify the first data point in

the waveform record.

5. Use the WFMPRe command to transfer waveform preamble

information.

6. Use the CURVe? command to transfer waveform data.

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-45

Command Descriptions

Commands either set or query oscilloscope values. Some commands

both set and query, some only set, and some only query.

Manual Conventions

This manual uses the following conventions:

HNo query form exists for commands identified as “Set Only”

HA question mark (?) appended to the command and “Query

Only” indicates query-only commands

HFully spells out headers, mnemonics, and arguments with the

minimal spelling shown in upper case; for example, to use the

abbreviated form of the ACQuire:MODe command, just type

ACQ:MOD

HSyntax of some commands varies, depending on the model of

oscilloscope and extension module you use; differences are noted

HCommand descriptions list specific oscilloscopes series (and

module) when commands are valid for only those products

NOTE. While Trigger View is active (when you push the TRIG VIEW

button on the front panel), the oscilloscope ignores the set form of

most commands. If you send a command at this time, the oscilloscope

generates execution error 221 (Settings conflict).

ACQuire? (Query Only)

Returns current acquisition settings.

Acquisition

Group

Command Descriptions

2-46 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

ACQuire?

Returns current acquisition settings.

ACQuire?

Might return the following string for the current acquisition:

ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER RUNSTOP;STATE 1;MODE SAMPLE;NUMAVG 16

ACQuire:MODe

Sets or queries the oscilloscope acquisition mode. This affects all

live waveforms and is equivalent to setting the Mode option in the

Acquire menu.

Waveforms are the displayed data point values taken from

acquisition intervals. Each acquisition interval represents a time

duration that is determined by the horizontal scale (time per

division).

The oscilloscope sampling system can operate at a rate greater than

that indicated by the horizontal scale. Therefore, an acquisition

interval can include more than one sample.

The acquisition mode, which you set using this ACQuire:MODe

command, determines how the final value of the acquisition interval

is generated from the many data samples.

Acquisition

ACQuire:MODe { SAMple | PEAKdetect | AVErage }

ACQuire:MODe?

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Group

Syntax

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-47

SAMple specifies that the displayed data point value is the first

sampled value that was taken during the acquisition interval. The

waveform data has 8 bits of precision in all acquisition modes. You

can request 16 bit data with a CURVe? query, but the lower-order

8 bits of data will be zero. SAMple is the default mode.

PEAKdetect specifies the display of the high-low range of the

samples taken from a single waveform acquisition. The oscilloscope

displays the high-low range as a vertical range that extends from the

highest to the lowest value sampled during the acquisition interval.

PEAKdetect mode can reveal the presence of aliasing.

AVErage specifies averaging mode, where the resulting waveform

shows an average of SAMple data points from several separate

waveform acquisitions. The number of waveform acquisitions that

go into making up the average waveform is set or queried using the

ACQuire:NUMAVg command.

ACQuire:MODe PEAKdetect

Displays a vertical area representing the range of the highest to

lowest value of the acquired signal.

ACQuire:MODe?

Might return SAMPLE.

WFMPre:PT_Fmt

ACQuire:NUMACq? (Query Only)

Indicates the number of acquisitions that have taken place since

starting oscilloscope acquisition. The maximum number of

acquisitions that can be counted is 231-1. This value is reset to zero

when you change most Acquisition, Horizontal, Vertical, or Trigger

arguments that affect the waveform except for the following:

HChanging the trigger level or trigger holdoff when in Sample or

Peak Detect mode does not reset the value

Arguments

Examples

Related Commands

Command Descriptions

2-48 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

NOTE. Any change made when in Average mode aborts the

acquisition and resets ACQuire:NUMACq to zero.

HTDS200: changing the vertical position does not reset the value

HTDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000

series: if the Trigger mode is set to Auto, and the Horizontal

Scale is 10 ms/div or slower, changing the vertical position does

not reset the value

NOTE. In Scan mode, ACQuire:NUMACq? always returns zero.

Acquisition

ACQuire:NUMACq?

<NR1>

ACQuire:NUMACq?

Might return 350, indicating that 350 acquisitions took place since

an ACQuire:STATE RUN command was executed.

ACQuire:NUMAVg

Sets the number of oscilloscope waveform acquisitions that make up

an averaged waveform. This command is equivalent to setting the

Averages option in the Acquire menu.

Acquisition

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Group

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-49

ACQuire:NUMAVg <NR1>

ACQuire:NUMAVg?

<NR1> is the number of waveform acquisitions. Correct values are 4,

16,64,and128.

ACQuire:NUMAVg 16

This specifies that an averaged waveform will show the result of

combining 16 separately acquired waveforms.

ACQuire:NUMAVg?

Might return 64,indicating that there are 64 acquisitions specified

for averaging.

ACQuire:STATE

Starts or stops oscilloscope acquisitions. This command is the

equivalent of pressing the front-panel RUN/STOP button. If

ACQuire:STOPAfter is set to SEQuence, other signal events may

also stop acquisition.

NOTE. The best way to determine when a single sequence acquisition

is complete is to use *OPC? rather than ACQuire:STATE?. For more

information on the *OPC? command, refer to page 2--169.

Acquisition

ACQuire:STATE { OFF | ON | RUN | STOP | <NR1> }

ACQuire:STATE?

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Group

Syntax

Command Descriptions

2-50 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

OFF | STOP | <NR1> = 0 stops acquisitions.

ON | RUN | <NR1> ≠0starts acquisition and display of waveforms. If

the command was issued in the middle of an acquisition sequence

(for instance averaging), RUN restarts the sequence, discarding any

data accumulated before the STOP. It also resets the number of

acquisitions.

ACQuire:STATE RUN

Starts acquisition of waveform data and resets the number of

acquisitions count (NUMACq) to zero.

ACQuire:STATE?

Returns 0or 1, depending on whether or not the acquisition system is

running.

*OPC?

ACQuire:STOPAfter

Tells the oscilloscope when to stop taking acquisitions.

Acquisition

ACQuire:STOPAfter { RUNSTop | SEQuence}

ACQuire:STOPAfter?

RUNSTop specifies that the run and stop states should be determined

by pressing the front-panel RUN/STOP button or issuing the

ACQuire:STATE command.

Arguments

Examples

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-51

SEQuence specifies “single sequence” operation, where the

oscilloscope stops after it has acquired enough waveforms to satisfy

the conditions of the acquisition mode. For example, if the

acquisition mode is set to sample, the oscilloscope stops after

digitizing a waveform from a single trigger event. However, if the

acquisition mode is set to average 64 waveforms, then the oscillo-

scope stops only after acquiring all 64 waveforms.

The ACQuire:STATE command and the front-panel RUN/STOP

button also stop acquisitions when the oscilloscope is in single

sequence mode.

ACQuire:STOPAfter RUNSTop

Sets the oscilloscope to stop the acquisition when you press the

front-panel RUN/STOP button.

ACQuire:STOPAfter?

Might return SEQUENCE.

ALLEv? (Query Only)

Causes the oscilloscope to return all events and their messages, and

removes the returned events from the Event Queue. The messages

are separated by commas. Use the *ESR? query to enable the events

to be returned. For a complete discussion of how to use these

registers, refer to page 3--1. This command is similar to repeatedly

sending *EVMsg? queries to the oscilloscope.

Status and error

ALLEv?

Examples

Group

Syntax

Command Descriptions

2-52 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

The event code and message in the following format:

<Event Code><Comma><QString>[<Comma><Event

Code><Comma><QString>...]

<QString>::= <Message>;[<Command>]

<Command> is the command that caused the error and may be

returned when a command error is detected by the oscilloscope. As

much of the command is returned as possible without exceeding the

60 character limit of the <Message> and <Command> strings

combined. The command string is right-justified.

ALLEv?

Might return the following string:

:ALLEV 2225,“Measurement error, No waveform to measure;

”,420,“Query UNTERMINATED; ”

*CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMsg?, EVQty?, *SRE,

*STB?

AUTORange?

(TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Series Only)

Returns current AUTORange settings.

Power Measurement

AUTORange?

Returns

Examples

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Examples

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-53

Might return :AUTORANGE:SETTINGS BOTH;STATE 1, indicating that

Autorange is active and adjusting both the horizontal and vertical

settings.

AUTORange:STATE

(TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Series Only)

Toggles Autorange off and on.

Miscellaneous

AUTORange:STATE { OFF | ON | <NR1> }

AUTORange:STATE?

OFF deactivates the Autorange feature.

ON activates the Autorange feature.

<NR1> = 0 deactivates the Autorange feature.

<NR1> ≠0activates the Autorange feature.

AUTORANGE:STATE ON

Starts the Autorange function.

AUTORANGE:STATE?

Returns 0or 1, depending on whether or not the Autorange function

is on.

AUTORange:SETTings

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Related Commands

Command Descriptions

2-54 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

AUTORange:SETTings

(TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Series Only)

Controls the parameters that the Autorange function can adjust. It is

equivalent to the option buttons in the Autorange menu.

Miscellaneous

AUTORange:SETTings { HORizontal | VERTical | BOTH }

AUTORange:SETTings?

HORizontal allows Autorange to adjust the horizontal, but not

vertical, settings.

VERTical allows Autorange to adjust the vertical, but not horizon-

tal, settings.

BOTH allows Autorange to adjust both the horizontal and vertical

settings.

AUTORANGE:SETTINGS VERTICAL

Turns on the Autorange vertical settings.

AUTORANGE:SETTINGS?

Might return VERTICAL, indicating that Autorange will only adjust

the vertical settings.

AUTORange:STATE

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Related Commands

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-55

AUTOSet (Set Only)

Causes the oscilloscope to adjust its vertical, horizontal, and trigger

controls to display a stable waveform. This command is equivalent

to pushing the front-panel AUTOSET button.

For a detailed description of the Autoset function, refer to the user

manual for your oscilloscope.

Miscellaneous

AUTOSet EXECute

EXECute invokes Autoset.

AUTOSet:ENABLE

(TDS1000B and TDS2000B Series Only)

Allows educators to disable or enable the Autorange and Autoset

functions. The function can be manually set from the Service Diag

menu. To access the menu, refer to the TDS1000B and TDS2000B

series service manual.

Miscellaneous

AUTOSet:SIGNAL? (Query Only)

(TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Series

Only)

Returns the type of signal discovered by the most recent execution of

Autoset.

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Group

Command Descriptions

2-56 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Miscellaneous

AUTOSet:SIGNAL?

Might return { LEVEL | SINE | SQUARE | VIDPAL | VIDNTSC |

OTHER | NONe }

LEVEL if the oscilloscope discovered a DC level.

SINE if the oscilloscope discovered a sine-like waveform.

SQUARE if the oscilloscope discovered a square-like waveform.

VIDPAL if the oscilloscope discovered a PAL or SECAM standard

video signal.

VIDNTSC if the oscilloscope discovered an NTSC standard video

signal.

OTHER if the oscilloscope was unable to classify the signal.

NONE if the AUTOSET menu is not displayed.

AUTOSet:VIEW

(TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Series

Only)

If the current menu is not the Autoset menu, or if the view is not

valid for the detected waveform, the set command causes the

oscilloscope to generate error 221 (Settings conflict).

Miscellaneous

AUTOSet:VIEW { MULTICYcle | SINGLECYcle | FFT |

LINENum | DCLIne | DEFault | NONE }

Group

Syntax

Returns

Group

Syntax

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-57

MULTICYcle displays a sine or square wave of several cycles. Default

for sine-like and square-like signals.

SINGLECYcle displays a sine or square wave of approximately one

cycle.

FFT displays the FFT of a sine wave.

RISING displays the rising edge of a square wave.

FALLING displays the falling edge of a square wave.

FIELD displays a video signal synchronized on all fields. This is the

default for video signals.

ODD displays a video signal synchronized on odd fields.

EVEN displays a video signal synchronized on even fields.

LINE displays a video signal synchronized on all lines.

LINENum displays a video signal synchronized on the specified line

number.

DCLIne returns a query response when the oscilloscope finds a DC

level.

DEFault returns a query response when the oscilloscope cannot

determine the signal type.

NONE returns a query response when the AUTOSET menu is not

displayed. Set is ignored.

AUTOSet:VIEW EVEN

The oscilloscope will display video signals synchronized on even

fields when operated in autoset mode.

BUSY? (Query Only)

Returns the status of the oscilloscope. This command allows you to

synchronize the operation of the oscilloscope with your application

program. Refer to Synchronization Methods on page 3--10 for more

information.

Arguments

Examples

Command Descriptions

2-58 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Status and error

BUSY?

0when the oscilloscope is not busy processing any of the commands

listed in Table 2--30 (*OPC) on page 2--170.

1when the oscilloscope is busy processing one of the commands

listed in Table 2--30 (*OPC) on page 2--170.

BUSY?

Might return 1, indicating that the oscilloscope is busy.

*OPC, *WAI

*CAL? (Query Only)

Performs an internal self-calibration and returns its status. This is

equivalent to selecting the Do Self Cal option in the Utility menu.

Although *CAL? is a query command, it does perform an action.

NOTE. The self-calibration can take several minutes to complete.

During this time, the oscilloscope does not execute any commands.

Disconnect all signals from the oscilloscope before performing an

internal self-calibration.

Calibration and Diagnostic

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Related Commands

Group

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-59

*CAL?

0indicates that the self-calibration completed without any errors

detected.

Any value other than zero indicates that the self-calibration did not

complete successfully or completed with errors.

*CAL?

Performs a self-calibration and might return 0to indicate that it

completed successfully.

CALibrate:INTERNAL

CALibrate:ABOrt (Set Only)

NOTE. You should only use this command in a qualified service

environment. For more information about the factory calibration

sequence, refer to the service manual for your oscilloscope.

Aborts the factory calibration process. When you abort the factory

calibration, the oscilloscope restores the calibration settings to the

previous factory calibration constants stored in non-volatile memory.

Calibration and Diagnostic

CALibrate:ABOrt

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Examples

Command Descriptions

2-60 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Stops the in-process factory calibration procedure.

CALibrate:CONTINUE (Set Only)

NOTE. You should only use this command in a qualified service

environment. For more information about the factory calibration

sequence, refer to the service manual for your oscilloscope.

Performs the next step in the factory calibration operation.

Calibration and Diagnostic

CALibrate:CONTINUE

Performs the next step in the factory calibration operation.

CALibrate:FACtory (Set Only)

NOTE. You should only use this command in a qualified service

environment. For more information about the factory calibration

sequence, refer to the service manual for your oscilloscope.

Starts the oscilloscope’s internal factory calibration operation. The

calibration operation consists of a sequence of steps. You send the

CALibrate:CONTINUE command to advance to the next calibration

step. The calibration program automatically sets up the oscilloscope

for each calibration step. Use the CALibrate:ABOrt command to

abort the factory calibration.

Group

Syntax

Examples

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-61

You can only send synchronization commands or queries (such as

*OPC, OPC?, *WAI, BUSY?) while doing a factory calibration.

Calibration and Diagnostic

CALibrate:FACtory

Starts the factory calibration process.

CALibrate:INTERNAL (Set Only)

Performs an internal self-calibration but does not return any status.

This is equivalent to selecting the Do Self Cal option in the Utility

menu.

NOTE. The self-calibration can take several minutes to complete.

During this time, the oscilloscope does not execute any commands.

Disconnect all signals from the oscilloscope before performing an

internal self-calibration.

CALibrate:INTERNAL

Performs an internal self-calibration.

*CAL?

Group

Syntax

Examples

Syntax

Examples

Related Commands

Command Descriptions

2-62 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

CALibrate:STATUS? (Query Only)

Returns the status of the last calibration operation performed (either

self- or factory-calibration) since power up.

Calibration and Diagnostic

CALibrate:STATUS?

PASS indicates that the oscilloscope completed the last calibration

operation without detecting any errors.

FAIL indicates that the oscilloscope detected errors during the last

calibration operation, or that no calibration operations have been

performed since power up.

CALibrate:STATUS?

Might return CALIBRATE:STATUS FAIL, if the oscilloscope failed the

last calibration operation.

CH<x>? (Query Only)

Returns the current oscilloscope vertical settings. The value of <x>

can vary from 1 through 4 for 4-channel instruments or 1 through 2

for 2-channel instruments.

Because CH<x>:SCAle and CH<x>:VOLts are identical, only

CH<x>:SCAle is returned.

Vertical

CH<x>?

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Group

Syntax

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-63

Oscilloscope vertical settings.

CH1?

Might return the following string for channel 1:

CH1:SCALE 1.0E0;POSITION 0.0E0; COUPLING DC;BANDWIDTH

OFF;PROBE 1.0E0

SELect:CH<x>

CH<x>:BANdwidth

Sets or queries the bandwidth setting of the specified oscilloscope

channel. The value of <x> can vary from 1 through 4 for 4-channel

instruments or 1 through 2 for 2-channel instruments.

This command is equivalent to setting the BW Limit option in the

Vertical menu.

Vertical

CH<x>:BANdwidth { ON | OFF }

CH<x>:BANdwidth?

ON sets the channel bandwidth to 20 MHz.

OFF sets the channel bandwidth to the full bandwidth of the

oscilloscope.

In most acquisition modes, full bandwidth is 60 MHz, 100 MHz, or

200 MHz (depending on the oscilloscope model). There are

exceptions.

Returns

Examples

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Command Descriptions

2-64 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Series

At vertical scales from 2.00 to 4.99 mV/div (sensitivity at the BNC;

that is, after the probe factor is removed), the full bandwidth is

20 MHz.

TDS200 Series

At vertical scales of 5 mV/div or less (sensitivity at the BNC; that is,

after the probe factor is removed), the full bandwidth is 20 MHz.

When the acquisition mode is Peak Detect, and the vertical scale at

the BNC is 10 mV/div or less, the full bandwidth is also 20 MHz.

CH2:BANDWIDth ON

Sets the bandwidth of channel 2 to 20 MHz.

CH1:BANDWIDth?

Might return OFF. This indicates there is no bandwidth limiting on

channel 1.

CH<x>:COUPling

Sets or queries the input attenuator coupling setting of the specified

oscilloscope channel. The value of <x> can vary from 1 through 4

for 4-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for 2-channel instruments.

This command is equivalent to setting the Coupling option in the

Vertical menu.

Vertical

CH<x>:COUPling { AC | DC | GND }

CH<x>:COUPling?

AC sets the specified oscilloscope channel to AC coupling.

Examples

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-65

DC sets the specified oscilloscope channel to DC coupling.

GND sets the specified oscilloscope channel to ground. Only a flat

ground-level waveform is displayed.

CH1:COUPlING AC

This establishes AC coupling on channel 1.

CH2:COUPlING?

Might return DC. Indicating that channel 2 is set to DC coupling.

CH<x>:CURRENTPRObe

(TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Series Only)

Sets or queries the scale factor of the specified channel for current

probes. The value of <x> can vary from 1 through 4 for 4-channel

instruments or 1 through 2 for 2-channel instruments.

You can issue this command when CH<x>:YUNit <QString> is set

to V. However, this command only affects the readouts when

CH<x>:YUNit <QString> is set to A.

Vertical

CH<x>:CURRENTPRObe { 0.2|1|2|5|10|50|100|

1000 }

CH<x>:CURRENTPRObe?

0.2 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 0.2X attenuation.

1sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 1X attenuation.

2 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 2X attenuation.

5 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 5X attenuation.

Examples

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Command Descriptions

2-66 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

10 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 10X attenuation.

50 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 50X attenuation.

100 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 100X attenuation.

1000 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 1000X attenuation.

<NR1>

CH2:CURRENTPRObe 1000

This sets channel 2 to 1000X attenuation.

CH1:CURRENTPRObe?

Might return 10.

CH<x>:INVert

NOTE. You can NOT use this command with a TDS210 or TDS220

oscilloscope with firmware below V 2.00 and a TDS2CMA

(or TDS2CM) communications module.

Sets or queries the inversion state of the specified oscilloscope

channel. The value of <x> can vary from 1 through 4 for 4-channel

instruments or 1 through 2 for 2-channel instruments.

This command is equivalent to setting the Invert option in the

Vertical channel menus.

Vertical

CH<x>:INVert { ON | OFF }

CH<x>:INVert?

Returns

Examples

Group

Syntax

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-67

ON inverts the specified oscilloscope channel.

OFF sets the specified oscilloscope channel to non-inverted.

CH1:INVert ON

Inverts the signal on channel 1.

CH2:INVert?

Might return OFF, indicating that channel 2 is not inverted.

CH<x>:POSition

Sets or queries the vertical position of the specified oscilloscope

channel. The value of <x> can vary from 1 through 4 for 4-channel

instruments or 1 through 2 for 2-channel instruments.

The position voltage value is applied to the signal before digitiza-

tion. This command is equivalent to adjusting the front-panel

VERTICAL POSITION knob.

Vertical

CH<x>:POSition <NR3>

CH<x>:POSition?

<NR3> is the position in divisions from the center graticule.

Table 2--28 lists the vertical position ranges using a 1X probe.

Arguments

Examples

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Command Descriptions

2-68 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Table 2- 28: Vertical position ranges using a 1X probe

CH<x>:SCAle Position range

2mV/div ±1000 divs

5mV/div ±400 divs

10 mV/div ±200 divs

20 mV/div ±100 divs

50 mV/div ±40 divs

100 mV/div ±20 divs

200 mV/div ±10 divs

500 mV/div ±100 divs

1V/div ±50 divs

2V/div ±25 divs

5V/div ±10 divs

CH2:POSition 1.32E0

Positions the channel 2 input signal 1.32 divisions above the center

of the display.

CH1:POSition?

Might return –1.32E0, indicating that the current position of channel

1 is at –1.32 divisions.

CH<x>:PRObe

Sets or queries the attenuation factor of the specified channel or

voltage probes. The value of <x> can vary from 1 through 4 for

4-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for 2-channel instruments.

Vertical

Examples

Group

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-69

CH<x>:PRObe{1|10|20|50|100|500|1000 }

CH<x>:PRObe?

1sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 1X attenuation.

10 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 10X attenuation.

20 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 20X attenuation.

(TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 series only)

50 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 50X attenuation.

(TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 series only)

100 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 100X attenuation.

500 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 500X attenuation.

(TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 series only)

1000 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 1000X attenuation.

<NR1>

CH2:PRObe 1000

Sets channel 2 to 1000X attenuation.

CH1:PRObe?

Might return CH1:PROBE 10

CH<x>:SCAle

Sets or queries the vertical gain of the specified oscilloscope

channel. The value of <x> can vary from 1 through 4 for 4-channel

instruments or 1 through 2 for 2-channel instruments.

This command is equivalent to adjusting the front-panel VOLTS/

DIV knob.

Syntax

Arguments

Returns

Examples

Command Descriptions

2-70 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Vertical

CH<x>:SCAle <NR3>

CH<x>:SCAle?

<NR3> is the gain, in volts or amps per division. For example, the

voltage range is 5 V/div to 2 mV/div when using a 1X voltage probe.

CH1:SCAle 100E–3

Sets the channel 1 gain to 100 mV/div.

CH2:SCAle?

Might return 1.0E0, indicating that the current V/div setting of

channel 2 is 1 V/div.

CH1:VOLts

CH<x>:VOLts

Sets or queries the vertical gain of the specified channel. The value

of <x> can vary from 1 through 4 for 4-channel instruments or 1

through 2 for 2-channel instruments.

This command is identical to the CH<x>:SCAle command and is

included for compatibility purposes. Only CH<x>:SCAle is returned

in response to a CH<x>? query.

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Related Commands

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-71

CH<x>:YUNit

(TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Series Only)

Sets or queries the units of the specified channel. The value of <x>

can vary from 1 through 4 for 4-channel instruments or 1 through 2

for 2-channel instruments.

Vertical

CH<x>:YUNit <QString>

CH<x>:YUNit?

<QString> is either “V” for volts or “A” for amps. This is equivalent

to setting the probe to Voltage or Current in the probe front-panel

menu. This command is case insensitive.

Examples

CH2:YUNIT?

Might return CH2:YUNIT “V”, indicating that the channel 2 units are

volts.

*CLS (Set Only)

The *CLS command clears the following oscilloscope status data

structures:

HThe Event Queue

HThe Standard Event Status Register (SESR)

HThe Status Byte Register (except the MAV bit described on

page 2--72)

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Command Descriptions

2-72 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

If the *CLS command immediately follows an <EOI>, the Output

Queue and MAV bit (Status Byte Register bit 4) are also cleared.

MAV indicates information is in the output queue. The device clear

(DCL) GPIB control message and the USBTMC INITIATE_CLEAR

control message will clear the output queue and also MAV.

*CLS does not clear the output queue or MAV. *CLS can suppress a

service request that is to be generated by an *OPC command. This

will happen if a hard copy output or single sequence acquisition

operation is still being processed when the *CLS command is

executed.

Refer to Registers on page 3--1 for more information.

Status and Error

*CLS

DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMsg?, *SRE, *STB?

CURSor? (Query Only)

Returns current cursor settings.

Cursor

CURSor?

Oscilloscope cursor settings.

CURSor?

Group

Syntax

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-73

Might return the following string as the current cursor settings:

CURSOR:FUNCTION VBARS;SELECT:SOURCE CH1; :CUR-

SOR:VBARS:UNITS SECONDS;POSITION1 0.0E0;POSITION2

4.48E–3;:CURSOR:HBARS:UNITS VOLTS;POSITION1 0.0E0;POSI-

TION2 5.0E–1.

CURSor:FUNCtion

Selects and displays the oscilloscope cursor type. Cursors are

attached to the waveform selected by CURSor:SELect:SOUrce. This

command is equivalent to setting the Type option in the Cursor

menu. Setting the function to anything other than OFF causes the

Cursor menu to be displayed.

NOTE. Setting the display format to XY removes the cursors. Sending

the CURSor:FUNCtion command when the display format is XY

causes the oscilloscope to generate event 221 (Settings conflict) and

leaves the display in XY format.

Cursor

CURSor:FUNCtion { HBArs | OFF | VBArs }

CURSor:FUNCtion?

HBArs specifies horizontal bar cursors that measure the vertical units

in volts, amps, divisions, or decibels.

OFF removes cursors from the display.

VBArs specifies vertical bar cursors that measure time or frequency.

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Command Descriptions

2-74 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

CURSor:FUNCtion VBArs

Selects vertical bar type cursors.

CURSor:HBArs? (Query Only)

Returns the current settings for the oscilloscope horizontal bar

cursors.

Cursor

CURSor:HBArs?

Current horizontal bar cursor settings.

CURSor:HBArs?

Might return the following string:

CURSOR:HBARS:UNITS VOLTS;POSITION1 0.0E0; POSITION2

0.0E0.

CURSor:HBArs:DELTa? (Query Only)

Returns the difference (in vertical units) between the two horizontal

bar cursors in the oscilloscope display.

NOTE. If Trigger View is active, this query returns 9.9E37 and

generates event 221 (Settings conflict).

Cursor

Examples

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Group

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-75

CURSor:HBArs:DELTa?

<NR3>

CURSor:HBArs:DELTa?

Might return 5.08E0 for the difference between the two cursors.

CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>

Positions a horizontal bar cursor. The value of <x> can vary from 1

through 2.

NOTE. If Trigger View is active, the query form returns 9.9E37 and

generates event 221 (Settings conflict).

Cursor

CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x> <NR3>

CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>?

<NR3> specifies the horizontal bar cursor position, relative to ground

(in volts when the units are volts and amps when the units are amps),

relative to the center of the screen (in divs when units are divisions),

or relative to 1 V RMS (in decibels when the source is an FFT math

waveform), for the waveform specified by the CURSor:SE-

Lect:SOUrce command.

The cursor position is limited to the graticule whenever an attempt is

made to move it outside the graticule.

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Command Descriptions

2-76 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

NOTE. The source always determines the measurement units.

CURSor:HBArs:POSITION1 25.0E–3

Positions one of the horizontal cursors at 25.0 mV (assuming the

vertical units are volts).

CURSor:HBArs:POSITION2?

Might return –6.40E–2, indicating that the second horizontal bar

cursor is at –64.0 mV (assuming the vertical units are volts).

CURSor:HBArs:UNIts? (Query Only)

Returns the vertical scale units for the selected cursor source

waveform.

Cursor

CURSor:HBArs:UNIts?

VOLts indicates volts from ground as the unit of measure.

DIVs indicates divisions as the unit of measure, with center of screen

as 0 divisions and bottom of screen as –4 divisions.

DECIBELS indicates decibels as the unit of measure, relative to a

rms sine wave. (FFT only)

UNKNOWN indicates that Trigger View is active. This also generates

event message 221. (Settings conflict)

AMPS indicates amps as the unit of measure. (TDS1000B,

TDS2000B, and TPS2000 series only)

Examples

Group

Syntax

Returns

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-77

VOLTSSQUARED indicates volts squared (V*V) as the unit of measure.

(TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 series only)

AMPSSQUARED indicates amps squared (A*A) as the unit of measure.

(TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 series only)

VOLTSAMPS indicates voltage times current (V*A) as the unit of

measure. (TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 series only)

NOTE. Unknown units are represented by ”?” in the oscilloscope

readouts.

CURSor:HBArs:UNIts?

Might return CURSOR:HBARS:UNITS VOLTS.

CURSor:SELect:SOUrce

Sets or queries the waveform that is the source of the vertical and

horizontal scale factors used in determining cursor values. This

command is equivalent to setting the Source option in the Cursor

menu.

Cursor

CURSor:SELect:SOUrce <wfm>

CURSor:SELect:SOUrce?

<wfm> specifies the waveform data source on which cursor

measurements will be taken.

Examples

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Command Descriptions

2-78 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

CURSor:SELect:SOUrce CH1

Selects channel 1.

CURSor:SELect:SOUrce?

Might return MATH.

CURSor:VBArs? (Query Only)

Returns the current vertical bar cursor horizontal position and units

settings.

Cursor

CURSor:VBArs?

Might return CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS SECONDS;

POSITION1 1.00E–6;POSITION2 9.00E–6

CURSor:VBArs:DELTa? (Query Only)

Returns the time or frequency difference between the two vertical

bar cursors. The units (seconds or Hertz) are specified by the

CURSor:VBArs:UNIts command. If the cursor source is an FFT

math waveform, CURSor:VBArs:DELTa is always in Hertz,

regardless of the value set by CURSor:VBArs:UNIts.

NOTE. If Trigger View is active, this query returns 9.9E37 and

generates event 221 (Settings conflict).

Examples

Group

Syntax

Examples

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-79

Cursor

CURSor:VBArs:DELTa?

<NR3>

CURSor:VBArs:DELTa?

Might return 8.92E–1, indicating that the time difference between

the vertical bar cursors is 0.892 seconds.

CURSor:VBArs:HDELTa? (Query Only)

(TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Series Only)

Returns the time or frequency difference between the two vertical

bar cursors. The units (seconds or Hertz) are specified by the

CURSor:VBArs:UNIts command. If the cursor source is an FFT

math waveform, CURSor:VBArs:DELTa is always in Hertz,

regardless of the value set by CURSor:VBArs:UNIts.

The command is identical to the CURSor:VBArs:DELTa? query. It is

included for compatibility with the TDS3000 series.

NOTE. If Trigger View is active, this query returns 9.9E37 and

generates event 221 (Settings conflict).

Cursor

CURSor:VBArs:HDELTa?

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Group

Syntax

Command Descriptions

2-80 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

<NR3>

CURSor:VBArs:HDELTa?

Might return 8.92E–1, indicating that the time difference between

the vertical bar cursors is 0.892 seconds.

CURSor:VBArs:HPOS<x>? (Query Only)

(TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Series Only)

Returns the waveform amplitude at the specified cursor position. The

units are specified by the CURSor:HBArs:UNIts query.

Cursor

CURSor:VBArs:HPOS<x>?

<x> specifies the cursor. Valid values are 1 and 2.

<NR3> indicates the amplitude value at the selected position.

CURSOR:VBARS:HPOS1?

Might return 1.37, indicating the value of one vertical bar tic.

CURSor:HBArs:UNIts

Returns

Examples

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Returns

Examples

Related Commands

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-81

CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>

Positions a vertical bar cursor. The unit is specified by the

CURSor:VBArs:UNIts command, and can be in units of seconds or

frequency (Hertz). If the cursor source is an FFT math waveform,

CURSor:VBArs:POSITION is always in Hertz, regardless of the

value set by CURSor:VBArs:UNIts.

NOTE. If Trigger View is active, the query form returns 9.9E37 and

generates event 221 (Settings conflict).

Cursor

CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x> <NR3>

CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>?

<x> specifies which cursor to position. Correct values are 1 and 2.

<NR3> specifies the cursor position in the units specified by the

CURSor:VBArs:UNIts command. The position is relative to the

trigger except when the cursor source is a math FFT waveform.

The cursor position is limited to the graticule whenever an attempt is

made to move it outside the graticule.

CURSor:VBArs:POSITION2 9.00E–6

Positions the second vertical bar cursor at 9 s.

CURSor:VBArs:POSITION1?

Might return 1.00E–6, indicating the first vertical bar cursor is at

1s.

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Command Descriptions

2-82 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

CURSor:VBArs:SLOPE? (Query Only)

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Returns the change in amplitude divided by the change in time, as

measured between the two cursors. The units are derivable from the

CURSor:HBArs:UNIts and CURSor:VBArs:UNIts queries.

Cursor

CURSor:VBArs:SLOPE?

Might return 1.22E3, indicating the slope measured between Vertical

Cursor 1 and Vertical Cursor 2.

CURSor:VBArs:UNIts

Sets or queries the units for the vertical bar cursors.

NOTE. When Trigger View is active, CURSor:VBArs:UNIts?

generates event 221(Settings conflict).

Cursor

CURSor:VBArs:UNIts { SECOnds | HERtz }

CURSor:VBArs:UNIts?

SECOnds specifies units of time.

Group

Syntax

Examples

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-83

HERtz specifies units of frequency (reciprocal of time).

CURSor:VBArs:UNIts SECONDS

Sets the units for the vertical bar cursors to seconds.

CURSor:VBArs:UNIts?

Returns HERTZ when the vertical bar cursor units are Hertz.

CURSor:VBArs:VDELTa? (Query Only)

(TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Series Only)

Returns the vertical (amplitude) difference between the two vertical

bar cursors. The units are specified by the CURSor:HBArs:UNits

query.

Cursor

CURSor:VBArs:VDELTa?

<NR3> indicates the vertical difference between the two vertical bar

cursors.

CURSor:VBArs:VDELTa?

Might return 1.064E+0, indicating that the vertical difference

between the vertical bar cursor ticks is 1.064 units.

Examples

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Command Descriptions

2-84 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

CURVe

Transfers oscilloscope waveform data to and from the oscilloscope in

binary or ASCII format. Each waveform that is transferred has an

associated waveform preamble that contains information such as

data format and scale. For information about the waveform

preamble, refer to WFMPre? (Query Only) on page 2--244. The data

format is specified by the DATa:ENCdg and DATa:WIDth com-

mands.

The CURVe? query sends data from the oscilloscope to an external

device. The data source is specified by the DATa:SOUrce command.

The first and last data points that are transferred are specified by the

DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP commands.

NOTE. If the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command is

not displayed, the CURVe? query returns nothing, and generates

events 2244 (Waveform requested is not activated) and 420 (Query

UNTERMINATED).

In Scan Mode (Sec/di ≥100 ms and AUTO Mode), approximately one

division’s worth of data points will be invalid due to the blanked

moving cursor.

The CURVe set command sends waveform data from an external

device to the oscilloscope. The data is stored in the stored waveform

location specified by DATa:DESTination, starting with the data point

specified by DATa:STARt. Only one waveform can be transferred at

a time. The waveform will only be displayed if the reference

waveform is displayed.

Refer to Waveform Commands on page 2--38 for a description of the

waveform transfer process.

Waveform

CURVe { <Block> | <asc curve> }

Group

Syntax

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-85

CURVe?

<Block> is the waveform data in binary format. The waveform is

formatted as: #<x><yyy><data> where <x> is the number of

characters in <yyy>. For example, if <yyy> = 500, then <x> = 3,

where <yyy> is the number of bytes to transfer. Refer to Block

Arguments on page 2--13 for more information.

If width is 1, then all bytes on the bus are single data points. If width

is 2, then all bytes on the bus are 2-byte pairs. Use the DATa:WIDth

command to set the width. <data> is the curve data.

<asc curve> is the waveform data in ASCII format. The format for

ASCII data is <NR1>[,<NR1>...] where each <NR1> represents a

data point.

CURVe?

Might return the following ASCII data:

:CURVE 13,6,3,2,–1,–9,–14,–19,–29,–35,–67,–1,–78,–62,

–50,–31,–27,–7,0,12,29,39,45,43,41,47,41,38,33,26

DATa, WFMPre

DATa

Sets or queries the format and location of the waveform data that is

transferred with the CURVe command. Since DATa:DESTination and

DATa:TARget are equivalent, only DATa:DESTination is returned by

the DATa? query.

Waveform

DATa { INIT }

Arguments

Examples

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Command Descriptions

2-86 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

DATa?

INIT reinitializes the waveform data settings to their factory

defaults.

DATa INIT

Reinitializes the waveform data settings to their factory defaults:

DESTINATION = REFA (=TARGET)

ENCDG = RIBINARY

SOUrce = CH1

START = 1

STOP = 2500

WIDTH = 1

DATa?

Might return the following string:

:DATA:ENCDG RPBINARY;DESTINATION REFA; SOURCE REFB;START

1;STOP 500;WIDTH 2

CURVe, WAVFrm

DATa:DESTination

Sets or queries the reference memory location for storing oscillo-

scope waveform data that is transferred into the oscilloscope by the

CURVe command. This command is identical to the DATa:TARget

command.

Waveform

DATa:DESTination REF<x>

Arguments

Examples

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-87

DATa:DESTination?

REF<x> is the reference memory location where the waveform will

be stored.

DATa:DESTINATION REFA

Stores incoming waveform data into reference memory REFA.

DATa:DESTINATION?

Might return REFB as the waveform location that is currently

selected.

CURVe?

DATa:ENCdg

Sets or queries the format of the waveform data. This command is

equivalent to setting WFMPre:ENCdg, WFMPre:BN_Fmt, and

WFMPre:BYT_OrasshowninTable2--29onpage2--88.

Setting the DATa:ENCdg value causes the corresponding WFMPre

values to update. Setting the WFMPre value causes the correspond-

ing DATa:ENCdg values to update.

Waveform

DATa:ENCdg { ASCIi | RIBinary | RPBinary | SRIbinary |

SRPbinary }

DATa:ENCdg?

Arguments

Examples

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Command Descriptions

2-88 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

ASCIi specifies the ASCII representation of signed integer

(RIBinary) data. If this is the value at power-on, the WFMPre values

for BN_Fmt, BYT_Or, and ENCdg are set as RP, MSB, and ASC

respectively.

RIBinary specifies signed integer data-point representation with the

most significant byte transferred first. This format results in the

fastest data transfer rate when DATa:WIDth is set to 2.

The range is –128 to 127 when DATa:WIDth is 1. Zero is center

screen. The range is –32768 to 32767 when DATa:WIDth is 2. The

upper limit is one division above the top of the screen and the lower

limit is one division below the bottom of the screen.

RPBinary specifies positive integer data-point representation with

the most significant byte transferred first.

The range is 0 to 255 when DATa:WIDth is 1. Center screen is 127.

The range is 0 to 65,535 when DATa:WIDth is 2. The upper limit is

one division above the top of the screen and the lower limit is one

division below the bottom of the screen.

SRIbinary is the same as RIBinary except that the byte order is

swapped, meaning that the least significant byte is transferred first.

This format is useful when transferring data to IBM compatible PCs.

SRPbinary is the same as RPBinary except that the byte order is

swapped, meaning that the least significant byte is transferred first.

This format is useful when transferring data to IBM compatible PCs.

Table 2--29 lists DATa and WFMPre parameter settings.

Table 2- 29: DATa and WFMPre parameter settings

WFMPre settings

DATa:ENCdg setting :ENCdg :BN_Fmt :BYT_Or

ASCIi ASC N/A N/A

RIBinary BIN RI MSB

RPBinary BIN RP MSB

Arguments

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-89

Table 2- 29: DATa and WFMPre parameter settings (Cont.)

DATa:ENCdg setting :BYT_Or:BN_Fmt:ENCdg

SRIbinary BIN RI LSB

SRPbinary BIN RP LSB

DATa:ENCdg RPBINARY

Sets the data encoding format to be positive integer where the most

significant byte is transferred first.

DATa:ENCdg?

Might return SRPBINARY for the format of the waveform data.

WFMPre:ENCdg, WFMPre:BN_Fmt, WFMPre:BYT_Or

DATa:SOUrce

Sets or queries which waveform will be transferred from the

oscilloscope by the CURVe?, WFMPre?, or WAVFrm? queries. You

can transfer only one waveform at a time.

Waveform

DATa:SOUrce <wfm>

DATa:SOUrce?

<wfm> is the location of the waveform data that will be transferred

from the oscilloscope to the external device. Allowable values are

CH<x>, MATH, and REF<x>.

Examples

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Command Descriptions

2-90 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

DATa:SOUrce REFB

Specifies that reference waveform REFB will be transferred in the

next CURVe? query.

DATa:SOUrce?

Might return REFA, indicating the source for the waveform data that

is transferred using the CURVe? command.

CURVe?, WFMPre?, WAVFrm?

DATa:STARt

Sets or queries the starting data point for waveform data transfers.

This command lets you transfer partial waveforms to and from the

oscilloscope.

Waveform

DATa:STARt <NR1>

DATa:STARt?

<NR1> is an integer value that ranges from 1 to 2500, and specifies

the first data point that will be transferred. Data is transferred from

<NR1> to DATa:STOP or 2500, whichever is less. When

DATa:STOP is less than DATa:STARt, the values are swapped

internally for CURVe?.

DATa:STARt 10

Specifies that the waveform transfer will begin with data point 10.

DATa:STARt?

Examples

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-91

Might return 214 as the first waveform data point that will be

transferred.

CURVe?

DATa:STOP

Sets or queries the last data point in the waveform that will be

transferred when executing the CURVe? command. This lets you

transfer partial waveforms from the oscilloscope.

When using the CURVe command, the oscilloscope stops reading

data when there is no more data to read or when the 2500 data point

limit is reached.

Waveform

DATa:STOP <NR1>

DATa:STOP?

<NR1> is an integer value that ranges from 1 to 2500, and specifies

the last data point that will be transferred. When DATa:STOP is less

than DATa:STARt, the values are swapped internally for CURVe?.

If you always want to transfer complete waveforms, set DATa:STARt

to 1 and DATa:STOP to 2500.

DATa:STOP 150

Specifies that the waveform transfer will stop at data point 150.

DATa:STOP?

Might return 285 as the last data point that will be transferred.

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Command Descriptions

2-92 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

CURVe?

DATa:TARget

Sets or queries the location for storing waveform data transferred

from an external device to the oscilloscope when executing the

CURVe command. This command is equivalent to the DATa:DES-

Tination command and is included here for compatibility with older

Tektronix oscilloscopes.

DATa:WIDth

Sets the number of bytes per waveform data point to be transferred

when executing the CURVe command. (Changing DATa:WIDth may

change the following WFMPre parameters: BIT_Nr, BYT_Nr,

YMULt, YOFf, and YZEro.)

Waveform

DATa:WIDth <NR1>

DATa:WIDth?

<NR1> = 1 sets the number of bytes per waveform data point to 1

byte (8 bits).

<NR1> = 2 sets the number of bytes per waveform data point to

2 bytes (16 bits). If DATa:WIDth is set to 2, the least significant byte

is always zero.

DATa:WIDth 1

Sets the data width to 1 byte per data point for CURVe data.

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-93

CURVe, WFMPre:BIT_Nr, WFMPre:BYT_Nr

DATE

(TDS2MEM, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Series Only)

Sets or queries the oscilloscope date value. The oscilloscope uses

these values to time stamp files saved to the CompactFlash card

(TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series only), or to the USB flash drive

(TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only), as well as show the time

and date on the oscilloscope display.

Miscellaneous

DATE <QString>

DATE?

<QString> is a date in the form “yyyy-mm-dd”.

DATE “2003-05-06”

Sets the date to May 6th, 2003.

TIMe

*DDT

Lets you specify a command or a list of commands to execute when

the oscilloscope receives a *TRG command, or the GET GPIB

interface message, or the USBTMC TRIGGER message. This is a

special alias that *TRG uses.

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Related Commands

Command Descriptions

2-94 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

TRG command, or the GET GPIB interface message, or the

USBTMC TRIGGER message.

Miscellaneous

*DDT { <Block> | <QString> }

*DDT?

<Block> or <QString> is a complete sequence of program messages.

The messages must contain only valid commands that must be

separated by semicolons and must follow all rules for concatenating

commands (refer to page 2--6). The sequence must be ≤80 characters.

<Block> format is always returned as a query response.

*DDT #217ACQuire:STATE RUN<EOI>

Specifies that the acquisition system will be started each time a

*TRG command is sent.

*TRG

DESE

Sets and queries the bits in the Device Event Status Enable Register

(DESER). The DESER is the mask that determines whether or not

events are reported to the Standard Event Status Register (SESR),

and entered into the Event Queue. Refer to the Status and Events

chapter on page 3--1 for more information.

Status and Error

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Related Commands

Group

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-95

DESE <NR1>

DESE?

<NR1> is an integer value in the range from 0 to 255. The binary bits

of DESER are set according to this value. For example, DESE 209

sets the DESER to the binary value 11010001 (that is, the most

significant bit in the register is set to 1, the next most significant bit

to 1, the next bit to 0, and so on).

The power-on default for DESER is all bits set to 1 if *PSC is 1. If

*PSC is 0, the DESER maintains its value through a power cycle.

NOTE. Setting DESER and ESER to the same value allows only those

codes to be entered into the Event Queue and summarized on the

ESB bit (bit 5) of the Status Byte Register. Use the *ESE command to

set ESER. For more information on event handling, refer to the

Status and Events chapter.

DESE 209

Sets the DESER to binary 11010001, which enables the PON, URQ,

EXE, and OPC bits.

DESE?

Might return the following string :DESE 186, showing that DESER

contains the binary value 10111010.

*CLS, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMsg?, *SRE, *STB?

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Related Commands

Command Descriptions

2-96 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg? (Query Only)

Returns the Pass/Fail status from the last diagnostic test sequence

execution (those run automatically at power on, or those requested

through the Service Menu). Use the DIAg:RESUlt:LOG? query to

determine which test(s) has failed.

Calibration and Diagnostic

DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg?

PASS means that the oscilloscope passes all diagnostic tests.

FAIL means that the oscilloscope has failed at least one of the

diagnostic tests.

DIAg:RESUlt:FLAG?

Returns either PASS or FAIL.

DIAg:RESUlt:LOG? (Query Only)

Returns the internal results log from the last diagnostic test sequence

execution (those run automatically at power on, or those requested

through the Service Menu). The list contains all modules and module

interfaces that were tested along with the pass or fail status of each.

Calibration and Diagnostic

DIAg:RESUlt:LOG?

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Group

Syntax

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-97

<QString> in the following format:

<Status>,<Module name>[,<Status>,<Module name>...]

DIAg:RESUlt:LOG?

Might return “pass-CPU, pass-ACQ1, pass-EXTENSION” for

power-up diagnostics.

DISplay? (Query Only)

Returns the current display settings.

Display

DISplay?

The current display settings

DISplay?

Might return :DISPLAY:FORMAT YT;STYLE VECTORS;

PERSISTENCE OFF;CONTRAST 50; INVERT OFF

DISplay:BRIGHTness

(TPS2000 Series Only)

Sets or queries the brightness of the LCD display.

Display

Returns

Examples

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Group

Command Descriptions

2-98 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

DISplay:BRIGHTness { 100 | 90 | 75| 60 | 45 | 30

|15|0}

DISplay:BRIGHTness?

Sets the display brightness in percent.

DISPLAY:BRIGHTNESS 75

Sets the display brightness to 75%.

DISplay:CONTRast

DISplay:INVert

DISplay:CONTRast

Sets or queries the contrast of the LCD display. This command is

equivalent to setting the Contrast option in the Display menu.

Display

DISplay:CONTRast <NR1>

DISplay:CONTRast?

<NR1> is an integer in the range from 1 through 100. The larger the

value, the greater the screen contrast.

DISplay:CONTRast 63

Sets the display contrast to 63%.

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-99

DISplay:INVert,

DISplay:BRIGHTness

DISplay:FORMat

Sets or queries the oscilloscope display format. This command is

equivalent to setting the Format option in the Display menu.

Display

DISplay:FORMat { XY | YT }

DISplay:FORMat?

XY displays the voltage of channel 1 (horizontal axis) against the

voltage of channel 2 (vertical axis).

NOTE. Setting the display format to XY turns cursors off. Sending the

CURSor:FUNCtion command when the display format is XY causes

the oscilloscope to generate event 221 (Settings conflict) and leaves

the display in XY format.

YT sets the display to vertical values versus time format and is the

default mode.

DISplay:FORMat YT

Selects a voltage versus time format for the display.

DISplay:FORMat?

Might return XY for the display format.

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Command Descriptions

2- 100 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

DISplay:INVert

Sets or queries the TDS1000 and TDS1000B display format. This

command is equivalent to setting the Display Style option in the

Utility Options menu for the TDS1000 and TDS1000B series.

The TDS2000, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 series do not have a

Display Style option, but accept the DISplay:INVert command and

query for compatibility. The query always returns OFF.

The TDS200 series is not supported.

Display

DISplay:INVert { ON | OFF}

DISplay:INVert?

OFF chooses a default black-on-white display.

ON chooses a white-on-black display.

DISplay:INVert?

Might return OFF.

DISplay:PERSistence

Sets the length of time that data points are displayed.

Display

DISplay:PERSistence{1|2|5|INF|OFF}

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Group

Syntax

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 101

DISplay:PERSistence?

1|2|5specifies the length, in seconds, that the waveform points

are displayed on the screen.

INF specifies infinite persistence.

OFF specifies that persistence is turned off.

0means that the persistence is turned off.

2or 5means that the persistence is set to two or five seconds.

99 means that the persistence is set to infinite.

DISplay:PERSistence 5

Specifies that the waveform points are displayed on the screen for

five seconds before they fade.

DISplay:STYle

Selects how to display the waveform data. This command is

equivalent to setting the Type option in the Display menu.

Display

DISplay:STYle { DOTs | VECtors }

DISplay:STYle?

DOTs displays individual data points.

VECtors connects adjacent data points.

Arguments

Returns

Examples

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Command Descriptions

2- 102 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

DISplay:STYle VEC

Sets the display to connect adjacent data points.

DISplay:STYle?

Might return DOTS indicating that the display shows individual

waveform data points.

ERRLOG:FIRST? (Query Only)

Returns the first entry in the error log, or an empty string if the error

log is empty. Use this command along with ERRLOG:NEXT? to

retrieve error log messages.

Calibration and Diagnostic

ERRLOG:FIRST?

Refer to the service manual for your oscilloscope for information

about error log message format.

ERRLOG:NEXT? (Query Only)

Returns the next entry in the error log, or an empty string if the error

log is empty or you have reached the end of the log. To start at the

top of the error log, run the ERRLOG:FIRST? query to return the

first error log message. Then use the ERRLOG:NEXT? query to step

through the error log.

Calibration and Diagnostic

ERRLOG:NEXT?

Examples

Group

Syntax

Returns

Group

Syntax

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 103

Refer to the service manual for your oscilloscope for information

about error log message format.

*ESE

Sets and queries the bits in the Event Status Enable Register (ESER).

The ESER prevents events from being reported to the Status Byte

for more information.

Status and Error

*ESE <NR1>

*ESE?

<NR1> is a value in the range from 0 through 255. The binary bits of

the ESER are set according to this value.

The power-on default for ESER is 0 if *PSC is 1. If *PSC is 0, the

ESER maintains its value through a power cycle.

NOTE. Setting the DESER and the ESER to the same value allows

only those codes to be entered into the Event Queue and summarized

on the ESB bit (bit 5) of the Status Byte Register. Use the DESE

command to set the DESER. Refer to Event Handling Sequence on

page 3--8 for more information.

*ESE 209

Sets the ESER to binary 11010001, which enables the PON, URQ,

EXE, and OPC bits.

Returns

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Command Descriptions

2- 104 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

*ESE?

Might return the string *ESE 186, showing that the ESER contains

the binary value 10111010.

*CLS, DESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMsg? *SRE, *STB?

*ESR? (Query Only)

Returns the contents of the Standard Event Status Register (SESR).

*ESR? also clears the SESR (since reading the SESR clears it).

Refer to the Status and Events chapter on page 3--1 for more

information.

Status and Error

*ESR?

Contents of the Standard Event Status Register.

*ESR?

Might return the value 213, showing that the SESR contains binary

11010101.

ALLEv?, *CLS, DESE, *ESE, EVENT?, EVMsg?, *OPC, *SRE,

*STB?

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Related Commands

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 105

EVENT? (Query Only)

Returns from the Event Queue an event code that provides

information about the results of the last *ESR? read. EVENT? also

removes the returned value from the Event Queue. Refer to Event

Handling Sequence on page 3--8 for for more information.

Status and Error

EVENT?

<NR1>

EVENT?

Might return :EVENT 110,indicatingtherewasanerrorina

command header.

ALLEv?, *CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVMsg?, *SRE, *STB?

EVMsg? (Query Only)

Removes from the Event Queue a single event code associated with

the results of the last *ESR? read, and returns the event code along

with an explanatory message. Refer to Event Handling Sequence on

page 3--8 for for more information.

Status and Error

EVMsg?

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Command Descriptions

2- 106 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

The event code and message in the following format:

<QString>...]

<QString>::= <Message>;[<Command>]

where <Command> is the command that caused the error and may

be returned when a command error is detected by the oscilloscope.

As much of the command as possible is returned without exceeding

the 60 character limit of the <Message> and <Command> strings

combined. The command string is right-justified.

EVMsg?

Might return the message :EVMSG 110, “Command header error”

ALLEv?, *CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, *SRE, *STB?

EVQty? (Query Only)

Returns the number of event codes that are in the Event Queue. This

is useful when using ALLEv? since it lets you know exactly how

many events will be returned.

Status and Error

EVQty?

<NR1>

EVQty?

Might return 3as the number of event codes in the Event Queue.

Returns

Examples

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 107

ALLEv?, EVENT?, EVMsg?

FACtory (Set Only)

Resets the oscilloscope to its factory default settings. Refer to

Appendix B: Factory Setup for a list of the factory default settings.

Miscellaneous

FACtory

Setting the oscilloscope to factory default has the following impact

on the programming interface:

HClears the Event Status Enable Register

HClears the Service Request Enable Register

HSets the Device Event Status Enable Register to 255

HSets the Power On Status Clear Flag to TRUE

HEnables all Command Headers (HEADer ON)

HSets the macro defined by *DDT to a “zero-length field”

HClears the pending operation flag and associated operations

HPerforms the equivalent of DATA INIT

The FACtory command does not alter the following items:

HState of the RS-232, GPIB, or USB interface

HSelected GPIB address

HFront panel LOCK state

HVerbose state

HDisplay Brightness, TPS2000 series only

HDisplay Contrast, TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B,

and TPS2000 series

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Command Descriptions

2- 108 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

HCalibration data that affects device specifications

HStored settings

HStored waveforms or data

HHard copy parameters

HDisplay messages language selection

HCurrent page of paged menus

HSAVE:IMAGE:FILEFORMAT

HFILESYSTEM:CWD

Refer to Appendix B: Factory Setup.

*PSC, *RCL, RECAll:SETUp, *RST, *SAV, SAVe:SETUp,

SAVe:IMAge:FILEFormat, FILESystem:CWD

FILESystem? (Query Only)

(TDS2MEM, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Series Only)

Returns the current working directory and amount of free space on

the CompactFlash card (TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series only), or on

the USB flash drive (TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only).

File system

FILESystem?

Might return FILESYSTEM:CWD “A:\”;FREESPACE 29691904.

Examples

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Examples

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 109

FILESystem:CWD

(TDS2MEM, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Series Only)

Sets or queries the current working folder path on the CompactFlash

card (TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series only), or on the USB flash

drive (TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only).

File system

FILESystem:CWD <folder path>

FILESystem:CWD?

<folder path> is a quoted string that defines the folder name and

path. The root folder is A:\. If there is no CompactFlash card or USB

flash drive installed in the oscilloscope, the query returns a null

string. This command is the easiest way for a program to check for

the presence of a CompactFlash card or a USB flash drive.

FILESystem:CWD “A:\MYDIR”

Sets the current working folder to MYDIR.

FILESystem:CWD?

Might return FILESYSTEM:CWD “A:\PROD-TST”, if PROD--TST is

the current working folder.

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Command Descriptions

2-110 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

FILESystem:DELEte (Set Only)

(TDS2MEM, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Series Only)

Deletes the specified file name from the CompactFlash card

(TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series only), or from the USB flash drive

(TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only).

File system

FILESystem:DELEte <file path>

<file path> is a quoted string that defines the folder path and file

name of the file to delete. The root directory is A:\. You cannot use

an asterisk (*) wild card character to delete multiple files. For

example, FILESYSTEM:DELETE “A:\PROD-TST\*.SET” is not valid.

FILESystem:DELEte “A:\PROD-TST\1ST-RUN\TESTFREQ.SET”

Deletes the setup file TESTFREQ.SET from the CompactFlash card

(TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series only), or from the USB flash drive

(TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only).

FILESystem:RMDir

FILESystem:DIR? (Query Only)

(TDS2MEM, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Series Only)

Returns a list of strings. Each string contains the name of a file or

folder in the current working folder on the CompactFlash card

(TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series only), or on the USB flash drive

(TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only).

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Related Commands

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 111

File system

FILESystem:DIR?

Might return FILESYSTEM:DIR “ALL000”,”ALL001”.

FILESystem:CWD

FILESystem:FORMat (Set Only)

(TDS2MEM, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Series Only)

Formats the CompactFlash card (TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series

only) or the USB flash drive (TDS1000B and TDS2000B series

only). Formatting a CompactFlash card or a USB flash drive deletes

all files and folders on the memory device.

File system

FILESystem:FORMat <drive>

<drive> is a quoted string that sets the CompactFlash card

(TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series only), or the USB flash drive

(TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only) to format. Valid drive

values are “A:” and “a:”. Using any other drive value returns an

error.

Group

Syntax

Examples

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Command Descriptions

2-112 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

NOTE. The oscilloscope reads the internal structure of the Compact-

Flash card or the USB flash drive every time the card is inserted. The

time to complete the read depends on the size of the card and how it

was formatted. To significantly shorten the initial read time of 64 MB

and larger cards, format the card or flash drive as FAT32 with your

personal computer.

FILESystem:FORMat “A:”

Formats the CompactFlash card, or the USB flash drive.

FILESystem:FREESpace? (Query Only)

(TDS2MEM, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Series Only)

Returns a numeric value, in bytes, of the memory space available on

the CompactFlash card (TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series only), or on

the USB flash drive (TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only). This

command returns 0 (zero) when there is no memory device installed

in the oscilloscope.

File system

FILESystem:FREESpace?

Might return 6242501.

Examples

Group

Syntax

Examples

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-113

FILESystem:MKDir (Set Only)

(TDS2MEM, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Series Only)

Creates a folder at the specified location on the CompactFlash card

(TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series only), or on the USB flash drive

(TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only).

File system

FILESystem:MKDir <folder path>

<folder path> is a quoted string that defines the location and name

of the folder to create. If you do not specify a path to the folder, the

oscilloscope creates the folder in the current working directory. The

current directory refers to the name of a folder as returned by the

FILESystem:CWD query.

Folder names must follow the same rules as file names. See

page 2--20.

FILESystem:MKDir “A:\PROD-TST\2ND-RUN”

Creates a new folder 2ND-RUN in the existing folder A:\PROD-TST.

FILESystem:MKDir “VID-EVAL”

Creates a new folder VID-EVAL in the current working folder.

FILESystem:CWD; FILESystem:RMDir

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Related Commands

Command Descriptions

2-114 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

FILESystem:REName (Set Only)

(TDS2MEM, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Series Only)

Assigns a new name to a file or folder on the CompactFlash card

(TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series only), or on the USB flash drive

(TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only). You can also move a file or

folder by specifying the new name in a different folder.

File system

FILESystem:REName <old filepath>,<new filepath>

<old filepath> is a quoted string that defines the path and name

of the file to rename. If you do not specify a path to the file, the

oscilloscope looks for the file in the current working folder. The

current directory refers to the name of a folder as returned by the

FILESystem:CWD query.

<new filepath> is a quoted string that defines the path and new

name of the file. If you do not specify a path to a folder, the

oscilloscope places the renamed file into the current working folder.

See page 2--20 for file naming rules.

FILESystem:REName “VID-CH1.BMP”,”VID-EVAL.BMP”

Renames the file VID-CH1.BMP to VID-EVAL.BMP in the current

working folder.

FILESystem:REName “VID-EVAL.BMP”,“A:\PROD-TST

\VID-EVAL.BMP”

Moves the file VID-EVAL.BMP to the folder A:\PROD-TST.

See page 2--20 for file and folder name rules.

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-115

FILESystem:CWD; FILESystem:RMDir

FILESystem:RMDir (Set Only)

(TDS2MEM, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Series Only)

Deletes a folder at the specified location on the CompactFlash card

(TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series only), or on the USB flash drive

(TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only).

File system

FILESystem:RMDir <folder path>

<folder path> is a quoted string that defines the location and name

of the folder to delete. If you do not specify a path to the folder, the

oscilloscope deletes the specified folder in the current working

folder. The current folder refers to the name of a folder as returned

by the FILESystem:CWD query.

NOTE. A folder must be empty before you can delete it.

FILESystem:RMDir “A:\PROD-TST\2ND-RUN”

Deletes the folder 2ND-RUN in the folder A:\PROD-TST.

FILESystem:RMDir “VID-EVAL”

Deletes the folder VID-EVAL in the current working folder.

FILESystem:CWD; FILESystem:MKDir

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Related Commands

Command Descriptions

2-116 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

HARDCopy

Sends a copy of the screen display followed by an EOI to the port

specified by HARDCopy:PORT. The format and layout of the output

is specified with the HARDCopy:FORMat and HARDCopy:LAYout

commands. This command is equivalent to pressing the PRINT

button on the front panel of the TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B,

TDS2000B, and TPS2000 series or the HARDCOPY button on the

front panel of the TDS200 series. :

NOTE. The TDS1000B and TDS2000B series support the HARDCo-

py:PORT commands and queries for compatibility with programs

designed for earlier oscilloscopes. (For TDS1000B and TDS2000B

series, you can only set the port to USB and the query will always

return USB).

The TDS1000B and TDS2000B oscilloscopes provide PictBridge

printer support through a USB Device port on the rear of the

oscilloscope. See the PictBridge commands on page 2--27.

HARDCopy? returns format, layout, and port information.

NOTE. This command is not IEEE Std 488.2-1987 compatible.

Hard copy

HARDCopy { ABOrt | STARt }

HARDCopy?

ABOrt terminates the hard copy output in process.

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-117

NOTE. DCL does not clear the output queue once a hard copy is in

process. The only way to abort the hard copy process is to send the

HARDCopy ABOrt command. The output queue can then be cleared

by sending a DCL message.

STARt initiates a screen copy that is sent to the port specified by the

HARDCOPY:PORT command.

NOTE. Use the *WAI command between HARDCopy STARt

commands to ensure that the first hard copy is complete before

starting another.

HARDCopy ABOrt

Stops any hard copy output that is in process.

*WAI

HARDCopy:BUTTON

(TDS2MEM, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Series Only)

Sets or returns the current PRINT front-panel button function. :

NOTE. This command does not affect the HARDCopy STARt

command.

Hard copy

HARDCopy:BUTTON { PRINTS | SAVESAll | SAVESImage }

Examples

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Command Descriptions

2-118 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

HARDCopy:BUTTON?

PRINTS sets the PRINT button to send the screen image to the

current printer port, using the current printer format.

SAVESAll sets the PRINT button to save all active oscilloscope

information (waveforms, screen image, settings) to files in a new

subfolder in the current CompactFlash card folder (TDS2MEM and

TPS2000 series only), or in the current USB flash drive folder

(TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only).

SAVESImage sets the PRINT button to save the screen image to a file

on the CompactFlash card or on the USB flash drive.

HARDCopy:BUTTON SAVESImage

Sets the front-panel PRINT button to save the screen image to a file

when pushed.

HARDCopy:FORMat

Sets the hard copy output data format. This command is the same as

setting the Format option in the UTILITY > Options > Hard Copy or

Printer Setup menu, depending on your oscilloscope model.

NOTE. The TDS1000B and TDS2000B oscilloscopes provide

PictBridge printer support through a USB Device port on the rear of

the oscilloscope. See the PictBridge commands on page 2--27.

The HARDCopy:FORMat is always Exif/JPEG when printing to a

PictBridge printer.

For TDS1000B and TDS2000B oscilloscopes, use the HARDCo-

py:FORMat command to set the file format when saving an image to

a USB flash drive or over USBTMC.

Arguments

Examples

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-119

Hard copy

HARDCopy:FORMat { BMP | BUBBLEJet | DESKJet | DPU3445 |

TIFF }

HARDCopy:FORMat?

BMP sets the hard copy output format to Microsoft Windows Bitmap

format.

BUBBLEJet (TDS1000, TDS2000, and TPS2000 series only) sets the

hard copy output format to Canon Bubblejet format.

DESKjet (TDS200, TDS1000, TDS2000, and TPS2000 series only)

sets the hard copy output format to HP DeskJet format.

DPU3445 (TDS1000, TDS2000, and TPS2000 series only), DPU411,

and DPU412 set the hard copy output format to Seiko formats.

EPSC60 sets the hard copy output to Epson C60 model printer format.

Available on TDS1000 and TDS2000 models with firmware versions

2.12 or greater (two channel models) or 4.12 or greater (four channel

models), any firmware version with a TDS2CMA, TDS2CMAX, or

TDS2MEM module installed, or the TPS2000 series.

EPSC80 sets the hard copy output to Epson C80 model printer format.

Available on TDS1000 and TDS2000 series models with firmware

versions 2.12 or greater (two channel models) or 4.12 or greater

(four channel models), any firmware version with a TDS2CMA,

TDS2CMAX, or TDS2MEM module installed, or the TPS2000

series.

EPSIMAGE sets the hard copy format data to Postscript format.

EPSOn (TDS200, TDS1000, TDS2000, and TPS2000 series only) sets

the hard copy output format to 9-pin or 24-pin dot matrix printer

format.

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Command Descriptions

2- 120 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

INTERLEAF (TDS200 series only) sets the hard copy format data to

Interleaf file format.

JPEG (TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only) sets the hard copy

format to JPEG format.

LASERJet (TDS200, TDS1000, TDS2000, and TPS2000 series only)

sets the hard copy output format to HP LaserJet II printer format.

PCX sets the hard copy output format to DOS Paintbrush format.

RLE (TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000

series only) sets the hard copy output format to Windows color

image file format (*.RLE). Use RLE for faster transfer rates and

smaller resulting files. Many programs that recognize .BMP files

also recognize .RLE files.

THINKjet (TDS200, TDS1000, TDS2000, and TPS2000 series only)

sets the hard copy output format to HP Thinkjet printer format.

TIFF (TDS1000, TDS2000, and TPS2000 series only) sets the hard

copy output format to Tagged Image File Format.

HARDCopy:FORMat LASERJet

Sets the hard copy output format to LaserJet II.

HARDCopy:FORMat?

Might return EPSON as the hard copy output format.

HARDCopy:INKSaver

(TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Series Only)

Sets the TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Ink Saver

feature to on or off. This command is equivalent to setting the Ink

Saver option in theUTILITY > Options > Printer Setup menu of

TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 oscilloscopes. This

command has no effect in TDS1000 oscilloscope, but is accepted for

compatibility.

Examples

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 121

NOTE. This command also controls the format of saved images.

Hard copy

HARDCopy:INKSaver { ON | OFF }

HARDCopy:INKSaver?

OFF prints “WYSIWYG” hard copies, with color waveforms on a

black background.

ON (default) prints color waveforms on a white background.

HARDCopy:INKSaver?

Might return ON

HARDCopy:LAYout

Selects the printing orientation. This command is equivalent to

setting the Layout option in the UTILITY > Options > Hard Copy

Setup menu.

NOTE. This command also controls the format of saved images.

Only TDS1000B and TDS2000B oscilloscopes are compatible with

PictBridge printers. When printing to a PictBridge printer, the

printer determines the orienatation and will override the argument.

Hard copy

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Group

Command Descriptions

2- 122 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

HARDCopy:LAYout { LANdscape | PORTRait }

HARDCopy:LAYout?

LANdscape specifies that the bottom of the hard copy is along the

long side of the piece of paper.

PORTRait specifies that the bottom of the hard copy is along the

short side of the piece of paper. This is the standard format.

HARDCopy:LAYout?

Might return PORTRAIT as the page layout format of the hard copy

output.

HARDCopy:PORT

Selects where to send the hard copy data when the oscilloscope

receives the next HARDCOPY STARt command. This command is

equivalent to setting the Port option in the UTILITY > Options >

Hard Copy Setup menu.

NOTE. The TDS1000B and TDS2000B oscilloscopes provide

PictBridge printer support through a USB Device port on the rear of

the oscilloscope. See the PictBridge commands on page 2--27.

Hard copy

HARDCopy:PORT { CENtronics | RS232 | GPIb | USB }

HARDCopy:PORT?

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Group

Syntax

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 123

CENtronics specifies that the hard copy data is sent out the

Centronics port.

RS232 specifies that the hard copy data is sent out the RS232 port. If

you set the port to RS232, and use it to transfer a BMP screen image

format file to a PC or other computer, observe the following

precaution that the BMP file is a binary file, and therefore does not

use linefeeds (hexadecimal 0a) as a terminator.

There are two ways to work around this limitation:

HWrite your controller program to use the byte count information

in the BMP file header.

HSet your RS232 program’s time out value to a large enough value

to guarantee that the program does not time out before complet-

ing the data transfer. For example, to transfer an 80 kB file at

9600 baud, set the transfer program time out to 300 seconds.

GPIb specifies that the hard copy data is sent to the GPIB port. This

argument is available on instruments with a TDS2CM, TDSCMA,

TDSCMAX, or TDSMM module installed.

USB specifies that the hard copy data is sent to the USB Device port

on the back of a TDS1000B or TDS2000B series oscilloscope only.

HARDCopy:PORT?

Might return RS232 as the selected hard copy output port.

HARmonics? (Query Only)

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Returns settings for the HARmonic commands.

Power Measurement

HARmonics?

Arguments

Examples

Group

Syntax

Command Descriptions

2- 124 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

HARmonics?

Might return :HARMONICS:ENABLE ON;SETUP AUTOMATIC;SHOW

ALL;SELECT 1;SOURCE CH1, indicating that the oscilloscope is

acquiring and showing all harmonics and measuring the first

harmonic from channel 1.

HARmonics:ENABle

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Turns the harmonics measurement on or off.

Power Measurement

HARmonics:ENABle { ON | OFF }

HARmonics:ENABle?

ON causes the oscilloscope to display the harmonics menu and turn

on Harmonics analysis.

OFF causes the oscilloscope to display the CH1 menu.

HARmonics:ENABLe ON

Causes the oscilloscope to display the harmonics menu.

HARmonics:ENABLe?

Might return OFF, indicating that the harmonics menu is turned off.

HARmonics:FREquency? (Query Only)

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Returns the frequency of the selected harmonic.

Examples

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 125

Power Measurement

HARmonics:FREquency?

<NR3>

HARmonics:FREquency?

Might return 3.60576923E2, indicating that the frequency of the

selected harmonic is 360.57 Hz.

HARmonics:SELect

HARmonics:HRMS? (Query Only)

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Returns the RMS amplitude of the selected harmonic in the same

units as the source waveform.

Power Measurement

HARmonics:HRMS?

<NR3>

HARmonics:HMRS?

Might return 6.18267221409E-1.

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Command Descriptions

2- 126 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

HARmonics:SELect

HARmonics:PERCent? (Query Only)

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Returns the amplitude of the selected harmonic as a percent of the

fundamental.

Power Measurement

HARmonics:PERCent?

Might return 5.0, indicating that the amplitude of the selected

harmonic as a percent of the fundamental frequency is 5.0%.

HARmonics:SELect

HARmonics:PHAse? (Query Only)

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Returns the phase of the selected harmonic, in degrees, relative to

the fundamental.

Power Measurement

HARmonics:PHAse?

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Examples

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 127

HARmonics:PHAse?

Might return 45.0, indicating that the phase of the selected

harmonic, relative to the fundamental frequency, is 45 degrees.

HARmonics:SELect

HARmonics:RMS? (Query Only)

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Returns the amplitude of the harmonics source in RMS. This may be

Vrms or Irms depending on the type of source waveform.

Power Measurement

HARmonics:RMS?

Might return 120.0, indicating that the RMS value is 120 volts

RMS.

HARmonics:SAVe (Set Only )

TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Sets the file name and path to save the selected waveform harmonic

data to the oscilloscope CompactFlash card in .CSV format.

The following data is included in the file:

HHarmonics, 1 through 50

HMagnitude

HPercent of fundamental

Examples

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Examples

Command Descriptions

2- 128 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

HFrequency

HPhase angle

NOTE. You can view the contents of the saved file on your personal

computer. You cannot recall saved harmonics files to the oscillo-

scope.

Power Measurement

HARmonics:SAVe <file path>

<file path> specifies the full path to save harmonic measurement

data.

HARmonics:”SAVe A:\data1.CSV”

Specifies the file name and path to save harmonic loss measurement

data to the oscilloscope CompactFlash card.

HARmonics:SELect

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Selects an individual harmonic. If the harmonics function is enabled

but the requested harmonic is not currently on the screen, the

oscilloscope will put it on the screen. If the harmonics function is not

enabled, the oscilloscope will remember the requested value but will

not enable the harmonics function.

Power Measurement

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Group

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 129

HARmonics:SELect <NR1>

HARmonics:SELect?

<NR1> specifies the harmonic from 1 to 50.

HARmonics:SELect 1

Instructs the oscilloscope to select the first harmonic.

HARmonics:SELect?

Might return 3, indicating that the third harmonic is selected.

HARmonics:SHOW

HARmonics:SETUp

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Sets or queries the operating mode of harmonics measurements.

Power Measurement

HARmonics:SETUp { MANUAL | AUTOMATIC }

HARmonics:SETUp?

MANUAL The oscilloscope does not adjust the setup when entering or

exiting the harmonics measurement mode.

AUTOMATIC The oscilloscope adjusts various settings to optimize the

harmonics display. The oscilloscope returns to your previous settings

when you exit the harmonics measurement mode.

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Command Descriptions

2- 130 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

HARmonics:SETUp?

Might return AUTOMATIC.

HARmonics:SHOW

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Sets or returns the type of displayed harmonics.

Power Measurement

HARmonics:SHOW { ALL | ODD | EVEN }

HARmonics:SHOW?

ALL displays both odd and even harmonics.

ODD displays odd harmonics only.

EVEN displays even harmonics only.

HARmonics:SHOW ALL

Instructs the oscilloscope to display all harmonics.

HARmonics:SHOW?

Might return HARMONICS:SHOW ODD, indicating that instrument

displays only the odd harmonics.

HARmonics:SELect

Examples

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Related Commands

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 131

HARmonics:SOUrce

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Sets the source in the power menu.

Power Measurement

HARmonics:SOUrce { CH<x> }

HARmonics:SOUrce?

CH<x> is one of the allowable input channels. The value of <x> can

vary from 1 through 4 for 4-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for

2-channel instruments.

HARmonics:SOUrce CH1

Sets the source for the harmonics function to CH1.

HARmonics:SOUrce?

Might return CH1, indicating that the harmonics source is channel 1.

HARmonics:THDF? (Query Only)

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Returns total harmonic distortion of the waveform as a percentage of

the fundamental.

Power Measurement

HARmonics:THDF?

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Group

Syntax

Command Descriptions

2- 132 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

<NR3>

HARmonics:THDF?

Might return 1.1117748204298E1, indicating that the total harmonic

distortion is 11.11% of the fundamental frequency.

HARmonics:THDR? (Query Only)

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Returns the total harmonic distortion of the waveform as a

percentage of the Vrms or Irms of the input signal.

Power Measurement

HARmonics:THDR?

<NR3>

HARmonics:THDR?

Might return 1.1094271493299E1, indicating that the harmonic

distortion is 11.09% of the RMS input voltage.

HDR

This command is identical to the HEADer query and is included for

compatibility with other Tektronix oscilloscopes.

Returns

Examples

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 133

HEADer

Sets and queries the Response Header Enable State that causes the

oscilloscope to either include or omit headers on query responses.

This command does not affect IEEE Std 488.2–1987 Common

Commands (those starting with an asterisk); they never return

headers.

Miscellaneous

HEADer { <NR1> | OFF | ON }

HEADer?

ON or <NR1> ≠0 sets the Response Header Enable State to true. This

causes the oscilloscope to include headers on applicable query

responses. You can then use the query response as a command.

OFF or <NR1> = 0 sets the Response Header Enable State to false.

This causes the oscilloscope to omit headers on query responses so

that only the argument is returned.

HEADer OFF

Causes the oscilloscope to omit headers from query responses.

HEADer?

Might return 1, showing that the Response Header Enable State is

true.

VERBose

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Related Commands

Command Descriptions

2- 134 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

HORizontal? (Query Only)

Returns all settings for the horizontal commands. The commands

HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle, HORizontal:MAIn:SECdiv, HORizon-

tal:SCAle, and HORizontal:SECdiv are equivalent, so HORizon-

tal:MAIn:SCAle is the value that is returned.

The commands HORizontal:MAIn:POSition and HORizontal:POSi-

tion are equivalent, so HORizontal:MAIn:POSition is the value that

is returned.

Horizontal

HORizontal?

Returns all horizontal settings

HORizontal?

Might return the following string:

:HORIZONTAL:VIEW MAIN;RECORDLENGTH 2500;MAIN:POSITION

0.0E0;SCALE 5.0E–4;HORIZONTAL:DELAY:POSITION 0.0E0;SCALE

2.5E–4

HORizontal:DELay? (Query Only)

Returns all settings for the window time base. The commands

HORizontal:DELay:SECdiv and HORizontal:DELay:SCAle are

equivalent, so only the values for HORizontal:DELay:SCAle are

returned.

Horizontal

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Group

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 135

HORizontal:DELay?

All settings for the window time base

HORizontal:DELay?

Might return :HORIZONTAL:DELAY:POSITION 0.0E0;

SCALE 5.0E–4

HORizontal:DELay:POSition

Sets or queries the window time base horizontal position. This

command is equivalent to adjusting the Horizontal Position when

Window Zone or Window is selected from the Horizontal menu.

Horizontal

HORizontal:DELay:POSition <NR3>

HORizontal:DELay:POSition?

<NR3> is the position in seconds. This value is the difference between

the trigger point and the center graticule. Positive values place the

trigger before the center graticule.

HORizontal:DELay:POSition 2.0E–6

Sets the window position to 2 s before the center graticule.

HORizontal:DELay:POSition?

Might return –1.0E–3, indicating that the window position is 1 ms

after the center graticule.

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Command Descriptions

2- 136 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

HORizontal:DELay:SCAle

Sets the time per division for the oscilloscope window time base.

This command is equivalent to setting SEC/DIV when Window Zone

or Window is selected from the Horizontal menu.

Horizontal

HORizontal:DELay:SCAle <NR3>

HORizontal:DELay:SCAle?

<NR3> is the time per division. The range depends on the oscillo-

scope model. The acceptable values are in a 1–2.5–5 sequence. If the

window time base scale is set slower than the main time base scale,

both the main and window time base scales are set to the window

scale value.

HORizontal:DELay:SCAle 2.0E–6

Sets the window scale to 2 s per division.

HORizontal:DELay:SCAle 9.0E–6

Sets the window scale to 10 s per division. Since 9 s is not a

correct value within the 1–2.5–5 sequence, it is automatically set to

the closest correct value.

HORizontal:DELay:SCAle?

Might return 1.0E–3, indicating that the window scale is 1 ms per

division.

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 137

HORizontal:DELay:SECdiv

This command is identical to the HORizontal:DELay:SCAle. It is

provided to maintain program compatibility with some older models

of Tektronix oscilloscopes.

HORizontal:MAIn? (Query Only)

Returns all settings for the oscilloscope main time base. The

HORizontal:MAIn:SECdiv and HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle com-

mands are identical so only HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle is returned.

Horizontal

HORizontal:MAIn?

All settings for the main time base.

HORizontal:MAIn?

Might return :HORIZONTAL:MAIN:POSITION 0.0E0;SCALE 5.0E–4

HORizontal:MAIn:POSition

Sets or queries the main time base horizontal position. This

command is equivalent to adjusting the Horizontal Position when

Main is selected from the Horizontal menu.

Horizontal

HORizontal:MAIn:POSition <NR3>

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Group

Syntax

Command Descriptions

2- 138 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

HORizontal:MAIn:POSition?

<NR3> is the position in seconds. This value is the difference between

the trigger point and the center graticule. Positive values place the

trigger before the center graticule.

HORizontal:MAIn:POSition 2.0E–6

Sets the main trigger position to 2 s before the center graticule.

HORizontal:MAIn:POSition?

Might return -1.0E-3, indicating that the main trigger position is

1 ms after the center graticule.

HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle

Sets the time per division for the main time base. This command is

equivalent to setting SEC/DIV when Main is selected from the

Horizontal menu.

Horizontal

HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle <NR3>

HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle?

<NR3> is the time per division. The range depends on the oscillo-

scope model. The acceptable values are in a 1–2.5–5 sequence.

Other values are forced to the closest acceptable value.

HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle 2.5E–6

Sets the main scale to 2.5 s per division.

Arguments

Examples

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 139

HORizontal:MAIn:SECdiv

Sets the time per division for the oscilloscope main time base. This

command is identical to the HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle command. It

is provided to maintain program compatibility with some older

models of Tektronix oscilloscopes.

HORizontal:POSition

Sets or queries the main time base horizontal position. This

command is identical to the HORizontal:MAIn:POSition command.

This command is included for compatibility.

Horizontal

HORizontal:POSition <NR3>

HORizontal:POSition?

<NR3> is the position in seconds. This value is the difference between

the trigger point and the center graticule. Positive values place the

trigger before the center graticule.

HORizontal:POSition 2.0E–6

Sets the main trigger position to 2 s before the center graticule.

HORizontal:POSition?

Might return -1.0E-3, indicating that the main trigger position is

1 ms after the center graticule.

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Command Descriptions

2- 140 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

HORizontal:RECOrdlength? (Query Only)

Returns the number of acquisition data points. For TDS200,

TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000

oscilloscopes, this value is always 2500, even in FFT mode. This

command is provided to maintain program compatibility with other

Tektronix digital oscilloscopes.

Horizontal

HORizontal:RECOrdlength?

2500

HORizontal:RECOrdlength?

Returns 2500 as the number of data points in each record.

WFMPre:NR_Pt?, WFMPre:<wfm>:NR_Pt?

HORizontal:SCAle

Sets the time per division for the main time base and is identical to

the HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle command. It is included for compati-

bility purposes.

HORizontal:SECdiv

Sets the time per division for the main time base and is identical to

the HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle command. It is included for compati-

bility purposes.

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Related Commands

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 141

HORizontal:VIEW

Specifies whether the horizontal display uses the Main, Window

Zone, or Window view. This is equivalent to setting the View in the

Horizontal menu.

Horizontal

HORizontal:VIEW { MAIn | WINDOW | ZONE }

HORizontal:VIEW?

MAIn specifies that the waveform is acquired and displayed using the

Main time base.

WINDOW specifies that the waveform is acquired and displayed using

the Window (delay) time base.

ZONE is the same as MAIn, but adds display of vertical cursor bars to

show the portion of the waveform that would be acquired and

displayed using the window (delay) time base.

HORizontal:VIEW MAIn specifies the default horizontal view.

ID? (Query Only)

Returns identifying information about the oscilloscope and its

firmware in Tektronix Codes and Formats notation.

NOTE. ID? must be the last command when part of a concatenated

statement. Otherwise the oscilloscope generates event message 440.

The ID? and *IDN? responses are slightly different.

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Command Descriptions

2- 142 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Status and Events

ID?

Returns the oscilloscope identification in the following format for

TDS2CM, TDS2CMA, and TDS2MM modules:

ID TEK/<model number>,CF:91.1CT,FV:v<oscilloscope

firmware version number>,TDS2XX:XXV:v<module firmware

version number>

Where XX is the module type, CM (TDS2CM or TDS2CMA

communications module) or MM (measurement module).

Returns the oscilloscope identification in the following format for

TDS2MEM modules:

ID TEK/<model number>,CF:91.1CT TDS2MEM:FV:v<module

firmware version number>

Returns the oscilloscope identification in the following format for

TPS2000 oscilloscopes:

ID TEK/<model number>,CF:91.1CT FV:v<oscilloscope

firmware version number> TPS2XXXV:v<module firmware

version number>

Returns the oscilloscope identification in the following format for

TDS1000B and TDS2000B oscilloscopes:

ID TEK/<model number>,CF:91.1CT FV:v<oscilloscope

firmware version number>

ID?

Might return the following response with a TDS2CMA installed:

ID TEK/TDS 220,CF:91.1CT,FV:v1.00 TDS2CM:CMV:v1.00

Might return the following response with a TDS2MEM installed:

ID TEK/TDS 2022,CF:91.1CT TDS2MEM:FV:v6.00

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 143

Might return the following response with a TPS2PWR installed:

ID TEK/TPS 2012,CF:91.1CT FV:v9.48 TPS2PWR1:v1.00

Might return the following response for a TDS1012B oscilloscope:

ID TEK/TDS 1012B,CF:91.1CT FV:v21.21

*IDN?

*IDN? (Query Only)

Returns the oscilloscope identification code in IEEE 488.2 notation.

NOTE. *IDN? must be the last command when part of a concatenated

statement. Otherwise the oscilloscope generates event message 440.

The *IDN? and ID? responses are slightly different.

Status and Events

*IDN?

Returns the oscilloscope identification in the following format for

TDS2CM, TDS2CMA, and TDS2MM modules:

TEKTRONIX, <model number>,CF:91.1CT FV:v<oscilloscope

firmware version number>,TDS2XX:XXV:v<module firmware

version number>

Where XX is the module type CM (TDS2CM or TDS2CMA

communications module) or MM (measurement module).

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Returns

Command Descriptions

2- 144 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Returns the oscilloscope identification in the following format for

TDS2MEM modules:

TEKTRONIX, <model number>,CF:91.1CT TDS2MEM:FV:v<module

firmware version number>

Returns the oscilloscope identification in the following format for

TPS2000 oscilloscopes:

TEKTRONIX,<model number>,CF:91.1CT FV:v<oscilloscope

firmware version number> TPS2XXXV:v<module firmware

version number>

Returns the oscilloscope identification in the following format for

TDS1000B and TDS2000B oscilloscopes:

TEKTRONIX/<model number>,<serial number>, CF:91.1CT

FV:v<oscilloscope firmware version number>

*IDN?

Might return the following response with a TDS2CMA installed:

ID TEKTRONIX,TDS 220,0,CF:91.1CT FV:v2.12 TDS2CM:CMV:

v1.04

Might return the following response with a TDS2MEM installed:

ID TEKTRONIX,TDS 2022,0,CF:91.1CT TDS2MEM:FV:v6.00

Might return the following response for a TPS2012 oscilloscope with

a TPS2PWR1 power analysis module installed:

TEKTRONIX,TPS 2012,0,CF:91.1CT FV:v9.48 TPS2PWR1:v1.00

Might return the following response for a TPS2022B oscilloscope

with the serial number CU10100:

TEKTRONIX,TDS 2022B,CU10100,CF:91.1CT FV:v20.22

Might return the following response for a TDS1012B oscilloscope

with the serial numbe CU010114:

TEKTRONIX,TDS 1012B,CU010114,CF:91.1CT FV:v21.21

Examples

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 145

ID?

LANGuage

Sets or queries the languages that the oscilloscope uses to display

information on the screen. This is equivalent to setting the Language

option in the Utility menu.

Miscellaneous

LANGuage { ENGLish | FRENch | GERMan | ITALian | SPANish

SIMPlifiedchinese }

LANGuage?

Specifies the language used to display oscilloscope information on

the screen.

LANGuage FRENch

Specifies that the oscilloscope displays information in French.

LANGuage?

Might return SPANISH

LOCk

Enables and disables all front-panel buttons and knobs. There is no

front-panel equivalent.

Miscellaneous

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Group

Command Descriptions

2- 146 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

LOCk { ALL | NONe }

LOCk?

ALL disables all front-panel controls.

NONe enables all front-panel controls. This is equivalent to the

UNLock ALL command.

LOCk ALL

Locks the front-panel controls.

LOCk?

Returns NONE when the front-panel controls are enabled by this

command.

UNLock

*LRN? (Query Only)

This is identical to the SET? query described on page 2--197.

Miscellaneous

*LRN?

MATH? (Query Only)

Returns the definition for the math waveform.

Math

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Group

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 147

MATH?

Definition for the math waveform.

MATH?

Might return the following for an FFT waveform:

:MATH:DEFINE ”FFT(CH1,HANNING)”;VERTICAL:POSITION

0.0E0;SCALE 1.0E0;:MATH:FFT:HORIZONTAL:POSITION

5.0E1;SCALE 1.0E0;:MATH:FFT:VERTICAL:POSITION

0.0E0;SCALE 1.0E0

MATH:DEFINE

Performs the specified mathematical operation on the input signal or

signals. To activate or deactivate the math waveform, use the

SELect:<wfm> command (refer to page 2--197).

Math

MATH:DEFINE <QString>

MATH:DEFINE?

NOTE. Remember that <QString> must be enclosed in quotes. You

can use white space characters between words.

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Group

Syntax

Command Descriptions

2- 148 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

<QString> specifies a math waveform, and can be one of the

following:

TDS1001, TDS1002, TDS1012, TDS2002, TDS2012 and TDS2022 models;

TDS210 and TDS220 models (firmware V2.00 and above) with a TDS2MM

measurement module.

CH1+CH2

CH1–CH2

CH2–CH1

FFT (CH<x> [, <window>])

TDS2004, TDS2014 and TDS2024 models; TDS224 model with a TDS2MM

measurement module.

CH1+CH2

CH3+CH4

CH1–CH2

CH2–CH1

CH3–CH4

CH4–CH3

FFT (CH<x> [, <window>])

TDS210 and TDS220 models, firmware below V2.00 with a TDS2CMA

communications module.

CH1–CH2

CH2–CH1

CH1+CH2

–CH1

–CH2

TDS210 and TDS220 models (firmware below V2.00) with a TDS2MM

measurement module.

CH1+CH2

(to subtract, invert one of the waveforms through CH<x>:INVert,

and then add)

FFT (CH<x> [, <window>])

Arguments

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 149

TDS210 and TDS220 models (firmware V2.00) and above with a TDS2CMA

communications module.

CH1+CH2

CH1–CH2

CH2–CH1

TDS224 model with a TDS2CMA communications module.

CH1+CH2

CH3+CH4

CH1–CH2

CH2–CH1

CH3–CH4

CH4–CH3

TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Series.

CH1+CH2

CH3+CH4 (4-channel models)

CH1–CH2

CH2–CH1

CH3–CH4 (4-channel models)

CH4–CH3 (4-channel models)

CH1*CH2

CH3*CH4 (4-channel models)

FFT (CH<x>[, <window>])

For FFT, the optional <window> argument is HANning, FLATtop, or

RECTangular.

MATH:DEFINE “CH1+CH2”

Sets the math waveform so that it displays the sum of channel 1 and

channel 2.

MATH:DEFINE “FFT (CH1, HANNING)”

Sets the math waveform to display an FFT of channel 1 using a

Hanning window.

Examples

Command Descriptions

2- 150 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

NOTE. You can use this example with a TDS1000, TDS2000,

TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 series oscilloscope, as well as

a TDS200 series oscilloscope with a TDS2MM measurement module.

MATH:FFT? (Query Only)

NOTE. You can use this command with a TDS1000, TDS2000,

TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 oscilloscope, as well as a

TDS200 oscilloscope with a TDS2MM measurement module.

Returns the current MATH:FFT display settings.

Math

MATH:FFT?

Might return the following:

:MATH:FFT:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 5.0E1;SCALE

1.0E0;:MATH:FFT:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0E0;SCALE 1.0E0

MATH:FFT:HORizontal:POSition

NOTE. You can use this command with a TDS1000, TDS2000,

TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 oscilloscope, as well as a

TDS200 oscilloscope with a TDS2MM measurement module.

Sets or queries the FFT math waveform horizontal position.

Group

Syntax

Examples

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 151

Math

MATH:FFT:HORizontal:POSition <NR3>

MATH:FFT:HORizontal:POSition?

<NR3> specifies the point in the FFT waveform data record to display

at the center vertical graticule line. The data record point is a

percentage of the total record length, in the range of 0 to 100. The

default value is 50. How much data is displayed depends on the FFT

Zoom factor setting. The oscilloscope rounds <NR3> to the nearest

workable value.

MATH:FFT:HORizontal:POSition 25

Sets the FFT waveform horizontal position such that the data at the

25% point of the record is centered on the display.

MATH:FFT:HORizontal:POSition?

Might return 5.0E1, indicating that the 50% point in the data record

is horizontally centered on the display.

MATH:FFT:HORizontal:SCAle

NOTE. You can use this command with a TDS1000, TDS2000,

TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 oscilloscope, as well as a

TDS200 oscilloscope with a TDS2MM measurement module.

Sets or queries the FFT math waveform horizontal zoom factor.

Math

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Group

Command Descriptions

2- 152 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

MATH:FFT:HORizontal:SCAle <NR3>

MATH:FFT:HORizontal:SCAle?

<NR3> specifies the horizontal magnification factor, where the axis of

magnification is the center vertical graticule line. Valid zoom factors

are 1, 2, 5, and 10. If other values are entered the oscilloscope

rounds the value of <NR3> to the nearest valid zoom factor.

MATH:FFT:HORizontal:SCAle 5

Sets the FFT waveform horizontal zoom factor to X5.

MATH:FFT:HORizontal:SCAle?

Might return 2.0E0, indicating that the zoom factor setting is X2.

MATH:FFT:VERtical:POSition

NOTE. You can use this command with a TDS1000, TDS2000,

TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 oscilloscope, as well as a

TDS200 oscilloscope with a TDS2MM measurement module.

Sets or queries the FFT math waveform vertical position.

Math

MATH:FFT:VERtical:POSition <NR3>

MATH:FFT:VERtical:POSition?

<NR3> specifies the FFT waveform vertical position in divisions.

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 153

MATH:FFT:VERtical:POSition 2

Sets the FFT waveform vertical position to 2 major divisions above

the center horizontal graticule line.

MATH:FFT:VERtical:POSition?

Might return 5, indicating that the FFT waveform 0 reference point

is 5 major divisions from the center horizontal graticule line.

MATH:FFT:VERtical:SCAle

NOTE. You can use this command with a TDS1000, TDS2000,

TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 oscilloscope, as well as a

TDS200 oscilloscope with a TDS2MM measurement module.

Sets or queries the FFT math waveform vertical zoom factor.

Math

MATH:FFT:VERtical:SCAle <NR3>

MATH:FFT:VERtical:SCAle?

<NR3> specifies the vertical zoom factor, where the axis of

magnification is the center horizontal graticule line. Valid zoom

factors are 0.5, 1, 2, 5, and 10. If other values are entered the

oscilloscope rounds the value of <NR3> to the nearest valid zoom

factor.

MATH:FFT:VERtical:SCAle 5

Sets the FFT waveform vertical zoom factor to X5.

MATH:FFT:VERtical:SCAle?

Examples

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Command Descriptions

2- 154 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Might return 2.0E0, indicating that the zoom factor setting is X2.

MATH:VERtical? (Query Only)

(TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Series Only)

Returns the MATH:VERtical display settings.

Math

MATH:VERtical?

Might return :MATH:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0E0;SCALE 5.0E-1,

indicating the math waveform position and scale.

MATH:VERtical:POSition

(TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Series Only)

Sets or returns the math waveform display position.

Math

MATH:VERtical:POSition <NR3>

MATH:VERtical:POSition?

<NR3> specifies the math vertical position in divisions from center

screen.

Group

Syntax

Examples

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 155

MATH:VERtical:POSITION?

Might return -3.0E0, indicating that the math waveform is 3

divisions below center screen.

MATH:VERtical:SCAle

(TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Series Only)

Sets or returns the math waveform display scale in units per division.

It is not possible to use this command to set the math scale to a fine

scale not achievable from the front panel. This command typically

rounds down to an achievable value. If the value input is below the

minimum value, then the command will round up.

Math

MATH:VERtical:SCAle <NR3>

MATH:VERtical:SCAle?

<NR3> specifies the math vertical scale in units per division.

MATH:VERTICAL:SCALE 5.0e0

Sets the math vertical scale to five math waveform units per

division.

MEASUrement? (Query Only)

Returns the current MEASUrement settings.

Measurement

Examples

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Group

Command Descriptions

2- 156 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

MEASUrement?

Oscilloscope measurement settings.

MEASUrement?

Might return the following:

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TYPE PERIOD;UNITS “s”;SOURCE CH1;

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:TYPE FREQUENCY;UNITS “Hz”;SOURCE CH1;

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:TYPE PK2PK;UNITS “V”;SOURCE CH2;

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:TYPE MEAN;UNITS “V”;SOURCE CH2;

:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE CRMS;UNITS “V”;SOURCE CH1

MEASUrement:IMMed? (Query Only)

Returns all immediate measurement setup parameters. Immediate

queries and commands are the preferred methods for programming.

An immediate measurement selection is not visible or accessible

through the display screen or front panel.

Measurement

MEASUrement:IMMed?

Immediate measurement setup parameters

MEASUrement:IMMed?

Might return PERIOD;“s”;CH1

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 157

MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce1

Sets or queries the source for single-source immediate measure-

ments.

Measurement

TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 series:

MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce1 { CH<x> | MATH }

MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce1?

CH<x> specifies the measurement source channel as one of the input

channels. The value of <x> can vary from 1 through 4 for 4-channel

instruments or 1 through 2 for 2-channel instruments.

MATH specifies the measurement source channel as the math

waveform. (TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 series only)

MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce CH1

Specifies channel 1 as the immediate measurement source.

MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Sets or queries the secondary source for dual-source immediate

measurements. For example, power analysis and phase angle

measurements.

NOTE. This command is only available when the Power Analysis

Module application key is installed.

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Command Descriptions

2- 158 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Measurement

MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2 { CH<x> | MATH }

MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2?

CH<x> specifies the measurement source channel as one of the input

channels. The value of <x> can vary from 1 through 4 for 4-channel

instruments or 1 through 2 for 2-channel instruments. For power

analysis, Source2 must be Amperes.

MATH specifies the measurement source channel as the math

waveform.

MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2 CH2

Specifies channel 2 as the immediate measurement source.

MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe

Sets or queries the immediate measurement type.

NOTE. Selecting one of the power arguments for this command,

without installing the Power Analysis Module application key, will

generate an error.

Measurement

MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe { FREQuency | MEAN | PERIod |

PWIdth | NWIdth }

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Group

Syntax

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 159

TPS2000 with a TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module only:

{ WFCREST | WFFREQ | WFCYCRMS | TRUEPOWER | VAR |

POWERFACTOR | PFPHASE | PHAse }

MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe?

FREQuency is the reciprocal of the period measured in Hertz.

MEAN is the arithmetic mean over the entire waveform.

PERIod is the duration, in seconds, of the first complete cycle in the

waveform.

PK2pk is the absolute difference between the maximum and

minimum amplitude.

CRMs is the true Root Mean Square voltage of the first complete

cycle in the waveform.

MINImum (TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and

TPS2000 series only) is the value of the smallest point in the

waveform.

MAXImum (TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and

TPS2000 series only) is the value of the largest point in the

waveform.

RISe ( TDS200 series with a TDS2MM measurement module,

TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 series

only) is the rise time between 10% and 90% of the first rising edge

of the waveform. Rising edge must be displayed to measure. The

oscilloscope automatically calculates the 10% and 90% measure-

ment points.

FALL (TDS200 series with a TDS2MM measurement module,

TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 series

only) is the fall time between 90% and 10% of the first falling edge

of the waveform. Falling edge must be displayed to measure. The

oscilloscope automatically calculates the 10% and 90% measure-

ment points.

Arguments

Command Descriptions

2- 160 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

PWIdth (TDS200 series with a TDS2MM measurement module,

TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 series

only) is the positive pulse width between the first rising edge and the

next falling edge at the waveform 50% level. Rising and falling

edges must be displayed to measure. The oscilloscope automatically

calculates the 50% measurement point.

NWIdth (TDS200 series with a TDS2MM measurement module,

TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 series

only) is the negative pulse width between the first falling edge and

the next rising edge at the waveform 50% level. Falling and rising

edges must be displayed to measure. The oscilloscope automatically

calculates the 50% measurement point.

WFCREST (TPS2000 series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module

only) is the measurement of the maximum value to the cycle RMS

value of the waveform, a unit-less ratio.

WFFREQ (TPS2000 series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module

only) is the measurement of frequency using the min-max, high-low

method.

WFCYCRMS (TPS2000 series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module

only) is the measurement of RMS voltage calculated over the first

cycle, using the min-max, high-low method.

TRUEPOWER (TPS2000 series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis

Module only) is the true power measurement in Watts. Source 1 must

be volts; source 2 must be Amperes.

VAR (TPS2000 series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module only)

is the reactive power measurement. Source 1 must be volts; source 2

must be Amperes.

POWERFACTOR (TPS2000 series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis

Module only) is the true power factor ratio measurement. Source 1

must be volts; source 2 must be Amperes.

PFPHASE (TPS2000 series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module

only) is the phase angle measurement in degrees. Source 1 must be

volts; source 2 must be Amperes.

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 161

PHAse (TPS2000 series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module

only) is the measurement of phase between source 1 and source 2, in

degrees.

MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe FREQuency

Defines the immediate measurement to be a frequency measurement.

MEASUrement:IMMed:UNIts? (Query Only)

Returns the units for the immediate oscilloscope measurement.

Measurement

MEASUrement:IMMed:UNIts?

<QString> returns “V” for volts, “s” for seconds, or “Hz” for Hertz.

For the TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 series, <QString> can

also return the following:

Afor amps

VA for volt-amps

AA for amps*amps

VV for volts*volts

You can also use this command for undefined math waveforms.

MEASUrement:IMMed:UNIts?

Might return “s”, indicating that the unit for the immediate

measurement is seconds.

Examples

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Command Descriptions

2- 162 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue? (Query Only)

Executes the immediate oscilloscope measurement specified by the

MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe command. The measurement is taken

on the source specified by the MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce

command. Immediate queries and commands are the preferred

measurement method for programming.

To check whether the measurement was successful, use the *ESR?

query followed by the EVENT? or ALLEv? queries to read the

Standard Event Status Register (SESR).

NOTE. If the channel specified by MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce is

not currently displayed, the oscilloscope generates event 2225 and

returns 9.9E37.

If Trigger View is active, Scan mode is in effect, or the display format

is set to XY, this query returns 9.9E37 and generates event 221

(Settings conflict)

When math is FFT, turned on, and used as a measurement source,

attempting to query the measurement value returns 9.9e37 and raises

error 2225 (no waveform to measure).

Measurement

MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue?

<NR3>

MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue?

Might return 28.75E6 if you are measuring the frequency of a

28.75 MHz signal.

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 163

MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue?

Might return 9.9E37, which means that the channel specified by

MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce is not currently displayed.

*ESR?

After a measurement query might return 16, indicating that there are

error messages in the queue.

ALLEv?

Might return :ALLEV 541,“Measurement warning, Low signal

amplitude: ”

*ESR?, EVENT?, ALLEv?

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>? (Query Only)

Returns all measurement parameters for the displayed oscilloscope

periodic measurement specified by <x>. Where <x> identifies the

measurement, 1 through 4 for the TDS200 series, and 1 through 5 for

the TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000

series.

Measurement

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>?

Settings for the specified measurement source.

MEASUrement:MEAS3?

Might return PERIOD;“s”;CH1

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Command Descriptions

2- 164 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOUrce

Sets or queries the source for an automated measurement. Where

<x> identifies the measurement, 1 through 4 for the TDS200 series,

and 1 through 5 for the TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B,

TDS2000B, and TPS2000 series.

This is equivalent to selecting the measurement source in the

MEASURE menu.

Measurement

TDS200, TDS1000, and TDS2000 series:

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOUrce CH<y>

TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 series:

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOUrce { CH<y> | MATH }

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOUrce?

CH<y> specifies the input channel source for the measurement.

MATH specifies the measurement source channel as the math

waveform. (TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 series only)

MEASUrement:MEAS2:SOUrce CH1

Sets the source for Measurement 2 to channel 1.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe

Sets or queries the on-screen periodic oscilloscope measurement type

for the measurement specified by <x>. Where <x> identifies the

measurement, 1 through 4 for the TDS200 series, and 1 through 5 for

the TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000

series.

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 165

This is equivalent to selecting the measurement type in the

MEASURE menu. Setting the type to anything other than NONE

displays the MEASURE menu on the screen.

NOTE. You should use the MEASUrement:IMMed command with

programming to take measurements, as this is preferred to the

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>command.

Measurement

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe { FREQuency | MEAN | PERIod |

| NWIdth | NONe }

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe?

FREQuency is the reciprocal of the period measured in Hertz.

MEAN is the arithmetic mean over the entire waveform.

PERIod is the duration, in seconds, of the first complete cycle in the

waveform.

PK2pk is the absolute difference between the maximum and

minimum amplitude.

CRMs is the true Root Mean Square voltage of the first complete

cycle in the waveform.

MINImum (TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and

TPS2000 series only) is the value of the smallest point in the

waveform.

MAXImum (TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and

TDS2000 series only) is the value of the largest point in the

waveform.

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Command Descriptions

2- 166 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

RISe (TDS200 series with a TDS2MM measurement module,

TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 series

only) is the rise time between 10% and 90% of the first rising edge

of the waveform. Rising edge must be displayed to measure. The

oscilloscope automatically calculates the 10% and 90% measure-

ment points.

FALL (TDS200 series with a TDS2MM measurement module,

TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 series

only) is the fall time between 90% and 10% of the first falling edge

of the waveform. Falling edge must be displayed to measure. The

oscilloscope automatically calculates the 10% and 90% measure-

ment points.

PWIdth (TDS200 series with a TDS2MM measurement module,

TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 series

only) is the positive pulse width between the first rising edge and the

next falling edge at the waveform 50% level. Rising and falling

edges must be displayed to measure. The oscilloscope automatically

calculates the 50% measurement point.

NWIdth (TDS200 series with a TDS2MM measurement module,

TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 series

only) is the negative pulse width between the first falling edge and

the next rising edge at the waveform 50% level. Falling and rising

edges must be displayed to measure. The oscilloscope automatically

calculates the 50% measurement point.

NONE disables the measurement specified by <x>.

MEASUrement:MEAS3:TYPe CRMS

Specifies MEAS3 to calculate the true Root Mean Square value.

Examples

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 167

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNIts? (Query Only)

Returns the units for the oscilloscope measurement specified by

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe. Where <x> identifies the

measurement, 1 through 4 for the TDS200 series, and 1 through 5 for

the TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000

series.

Measurement

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNIts?

<QString> returns “V” for volts, “s” for seconds, or “Hz” for Hertz,

or a null string if MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe is set to NONE.

For the TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 series, <QString> can

also return the following:

Afor amps

VA for volt-amps

AA for amps*amps

VV for volts*volts

You can also use this command for undefined math waveforms.

MEASUrement:MEAS3:UNIts?

Might return “V”, indicating the units for measurement 3 are volts.

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Command Descriptions

2- 168 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VALue? (Query Only)

Returns the value that has been calculated for the oscilloscope

on-screen periodic measurement specified by <x>. Where <x>

identifies the measurement, 1 through 4 for the TDS200 series, and 1

through 5 for the TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and

TPS2000 series.

This value is a display value and will be updated about every 1/2

second if both the MEASURE menu and the MEAS<x> source

channel are displayed. If you are acquiring at a slow sweep rate, the

oscilloscope may take longer than 1/2 second to update.

NOTE. MEASurement:IMMed is usually more useful than MEASUre-

ment:MEAS<x> when using the oscilloscope with external devices.

If MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe is set to NONE, MEASUre-

ment:MEAS<x>:VALue? generates event message 2231 (Measure-

ment error, measurement is not activated) and returns 9.9E37.

If the channel specified by MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOUrce is not

displayed on the oscilloscope, the oscilloscope generates event

message 2225 (Measurement error, no waveform to measure) and

returns 9.9E37.

Use the *ESR? and ALLEv? queries to check for measurement

errors. An example error is “2204, Low signal amplitude”.

NOTE. If Trigger View is active, scan mode is in effect, or the display

format set to XY, this query generates event 221 (Settings conflict)

and returns 9.9E37.

NOTE. When math is FFT, turned on, and used as a measurement

source, attempting to query the measurement value returns 9.9e37

and raises error 2225 (no waveform to measure).

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 169

Measurement

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VALue?

<NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS3:VALue?

Might return 28.75E6 if measurement number three is frequency.

*OPC

The *OPC? query and the *OPC set command provide two different

methods for checking for the completion of the commands listed in

Table 2--30 on page 2--170, such as single sequence acquisitions.

The *OPC? query uses a more simple method than the *OPC set

command. The *OPC? query places the ASCII character “1” into the

output queue when all pending operations listed in Table 2--30 are

complete. If none of the operations are pending, the *OPC? query

immediately places a “1” in the output queue.

NOTE. When using the *OPC? query method, the time-out on your

controller must be set for longer than the operation for which the

controller is waiting, such as a single sequence acquisition.

Unlike the *OPC command, the *OPC? query does not affect the

OPC Event bit in the Standard Event Status Register (ESR).

The *OPC set command uses a more complex method than the

*OPC? query. However, there are advantages to using this method in

some situations. For more information, refer to Using the *OPC Set

Command on page 3--14. Table 2--30 lists commands that generate an

Operation Complete message.

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Command Descriptions

2- 170 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Table 2- 30: Commands that generate an Operation Complete message

Command Operation

*CAL?, CALibrate:CONTINUE,

CALIbrate:FACtory, CALIbrate:INTERNAL

Internal self-calibration

ACQuire:STATE ON or

ACQuire:STATE RUN

(when ACQuire:STOPAfter is set to SEQuence)

Busy single sequence

acquisition

HARDCopy STARt Busy hard copy output

Status and Error

*OPC

*OPC?

Using the *OPC? query to check for the completion of the single

sequence acquisition:

ACQuire:STOPAfter SEQUENCE

ACQuire:STATE ON

*OPC? will return a 1after the acquisition is complete.

Refer to page 3--14 for examples of how to use the *OPC set

command.

ALLEv, BUSY?, DESE, *ESR?, *WAI

Group

Syntax

Examples

Related Commands

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 171

PICTBridge:DEF (Set Only)

(TDS1000B and TDS2000B Series Only)

Sets the arguments for all PictBridge commands to their default

values. The default values are the same as the default settings for the

printer. This command is equivalent to setting all the options to

default in the UTILITY > Options > Printer Setup > PRINT Button >

Prints menu of TDS1000B and TDS2000B oscilloscopes.

NOTE. The HARDCopy:BUTTON, HARDCopy:INKSaver, and

HARDCopy:LAYOUT commands apply to the TDS1000B and

TDS2000B oscilloscopes. Refer to page 2--117 for descriptions.

PictBridge

PICTBridge:DEF

Sets the parameters for the compatible printer to the default values.

PICTBridge:PAPERSIZE

(TDS1000B and TDS2000B Series Only)

Sets the paper size of the hard copy from those available on the

compatible printer. This command is equivalent to setting the Paper

Size option in the UTILITY > Options > Printer Setup > PRINT

Button > Prints menu of TDS1000B and TDS2000B oscilloscopes.

PictBridge

Group

Syntax

Examples

Group

Command Descriptions

2- 172 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

PICTBridge:PAPERSIZE { DEFLT|L|L2|HAGAKIPCARD |

IN11BY17|A0|A1|A2|A3|A4|A5|A6|A7|A8|

A9|B0|B1|B2|B3|B4|B5|B6|B7|B8|B9|

ROLL89MM | ROLL127MM | ROLL100MM | ROLL210MM }

PICTBridge:PAPERSIZE?

DEFLT specifies the default paper size of the printer.

Any paper size argument is valid when the paper is available for the

printer.

PICTBridge:PAPERSIZE?

Might return LETTER as the selected paper size for the printer.

PICTBridge:IMAGESIZE

(TDS1000B and TDS2000B Series Only)

Sets the size of the image to print. This command is equivalent to

setting the Image Size option in the UTILITY > Options > Printer

Setup > PRINT Button > Prints menu of TDS1000B and TDS2000B

oscilloscopes.

PictBridge

PICTBridge:IMAGESIZE { DEFLT | IN2P5BY3P25|L|IN4BY6

| L2 | IN8BY10 | L4|E|CARD | HAGAKIPC | CM6BY8 |

CM18BY24 | A4 | LETTER }

PICTBridge:IMAGESIZE?

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Group

Syntax

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 173

DEFLT specifies the default size of the image to print.

All image size arguments are valid as long as the paper size can

accommodate the image. The paper size should be larger than the

image size.

PICTBridge:IMAGESIZE?

Might return LETTER as the size of the image to print.

PICTBridge:PAPERTYPE

(TDS1000B and TDS2000B Series Only)

Sets the type of paper from those available on the compatible printer.

This command is equivalent to setting the Paper Type option in the

UTILITY > Options > Printer Setup > PRINT Button > Prints menu

of TDS1000B and TDS2000B oscilloscopes.

PictBridge

PICTBridge:PAPERTYPE { DEFLT | PLAIN | PHOTO |

FASTPHOTO}

PICTBridge:PAPERTYPE?

DEFLT specifies the type of paper used by default in the printer.

PICTBridge:PAPERTYPE?

Might return PLAIN as the paper type.

Arguments

Examples

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Command Descriptions

2- 174 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

PICTBridge:PRINTQUAL

(TDS1000B and TDS2000B Series Only)

Sets the quality of the print from those available on the compatible

printer. This command is equivalent to setting the Print Quality

option in the UTILITY > Options > Printer Setup > PRINT Button >

Prints menu of TDS1000B and TDS2000B oscilloscopes.

PictBridge

PICTBridge:PRINTQUAL { DEFLT | NRMAL | FINE | DRAFT }

PICTBridge:PRINTQUAL?

DEFLT specifies the quality of the hard copy used by default on the

printer.

NRMAL prints a normal quality hard copy.

FINE prints a high quality hard copy.

DRAFT prints a low quality hard copy.

PICTBridge:PRINTQUAL?

Might return DRAFT as the quality of the print.

PICTBridge:DATEPRINT

(TDS1000B and TDS2000B Series Only)

Sets the date and time to be printed on the hard copy if the feature is

available on the compatible printer. This command is equivalent to

setting the Date Print option in the UTILITY > Options > Printer

Setup > PRINT Button > Prints menu of TDS1000B and TDS2000B

oscilloscopes.

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 175

PictBridge

PICTBridge:DATEPRINT { DEFLT | OFF | ON }

PICTBridge:DATEPRINT?

DEFLT will match the default setting of the printer: on or off.

ON prints the date and time on the hard copy.

OFF does not print the date and time.

PICTBridge:DATEPRINT?

Might return ON if the printer is set to print the date and time.

PICTBridge:IDPRINT

(TDS1000B and TDS2000B Series Only)

Sets the oscilloscope model and serial number to be printed on the

hard copy if the feature is available on the compatible printer. This

command is equivalent to setting the ID Print option in the UTILITY

> Options > Printer Setup > PRINT Button > Prints menu of

TDS1000B and TDS2000B oscilloscopes.

PictBridge

PICTBridge:IDPRINT { DEFLT | OFF | ON }

PICTBridge:IDPRINT?

DEFLT will match the default setting of the printer: on or off.

ON prints the model and serial number on the hard copy.

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Command Descriptions

2- 176 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

OFF does not print the model and serial number.

PICTBridge:IDPRINT?

Might return ON if the printer is set to print the model and serial

number.

POWer? (Query Only)

(TPS2000 Series Only)

Returns the current POWer measurement settings.

Power and Battery-Related

POWer?

POWER?

Might return the following:

:POWER:AC:PRESENT 1;:POWER:BATTERY1:GASGAUGE 0

;STATUS NOTINSTALLED;:POWER:BATTERY2:GASGAUGE 0

;STATUS NOTINSTALLED;:POWER:BATTERIES:TIME 0;

:POWER:BUTTONLIGHT 1

POWer:AC:PRESENt? (Query Only)

(TPS2000 Series Only)

Returns a statement indicating whether the oscilloscope is being

Power and Battery-Related

Examples

Group

Syntax

Examples

Group

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 177

POWer:AC:PRESENt?

0if the oscilloscope is being powered by battery.

1if the oscilloscope is being powered by AC.

POWER:AC:PRESENT?

Might return 0, specifying that the oscilloscope is being powered by

its battery.

POWer:BATTERY<x>:GASgauge? (Query Only)

(TPS2000 Series Only)

Returns the amount of charge remaining in Battery x, where x is

Battery 1 or Battery 2.

This command is valid only if POWer:BATTERY<x>:STATUS? returns

NORMAL.

Power and Battery-Related

POWer:BATTERY<x>:GASgauge?

<NR1>, a number between 0 and 100, indicates the charge remaining

in the battery. 0 indicates the battery is fully discharged. 100

indicates the battery is fully charged.

POWER:BATTERY1:GASgauge?

Might return 60, specifying that battery 1 is 60% charged.

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Command Descriptions

2- 178 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

POWer:BATTERY<x>:STATUS? (Query Only)

(TPS2000 Series Only)

Returns the status of battery x, where x is Battery 1 or Battery 2.

Power and Battery-Related

POWer:BATTERY<x>:STATUS?

FULL indicates that the battery is fully charged.

DISCHARGED indicates that the battery has no charge remaining. The

battery can be discharged, but still report a small percent remaining.

UNCALIBRATED indicates that the oscilloscope cannot predict the

battery charge remaining.

NOTINSTALLED indicates that the battery is not installed in the

oscilloscope.

NORMAL indicates that the battery status is not any of the states listed

above.

POWER:BATTERY1:STATUS?

Might return FULL, which indicates that Battery 1 is at maximum

capacity.

POWer:BATTERIES:TIME? (Query Only)

(TPS2000 Series Only)

Returns the charge remaining in both batteries. This value is not

accurate when either battery is uncalibrated.

Power and Battery-Related

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Group

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 179

POWer:BATTERIES:TIME?

<NR1> specifies the operating time remaining for both batteries in

minutes.

POWER:BATTERIES:TIME?

Might return 10, specifying that the battery or batteries installed can

provide about 10 minutes of power to the oscilloscope.

POWer:BUTTONLIGHT

(TPS2000 Series Only)

Turns the lights on the front-panel buttons of the TPS2000 on and

off.

Power and Battery-Related

POWer:BUTTONLIGHT <NR1> | ON | OFF

POWer:BUTTONLIGHT?

ON or <NR1> ≠0 turns the lights on.

OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns the lights off.

POWER:BUTTONLIGHT ON

Sets the front-panel button lights to on.

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Command Descriptions

2- 180 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

POWerANALYSIS:SOUrces

(TPS2000 Series Only)

Sets or queries the Power Analysis sources. This command is

equivalent to setting the Sources option in the Power Analysis menu.

It does not affect the sources for any customer--visible PI measure-

ments.

Power Measurement

POWerANALYSIS:SOUrces { CH1CH2 | CH3CH4 }

POWerANALYSIS:SOUrces?

CH1CH2 selects Channel 1 and Channel 2 as the power analysis

source.

CH3CH4 selects Channel 3 and Channel 4 as the power analysis

source.

NOTE. The “CH3CH4” argument is only valid for instruments with

four channels.

POWerANALYSIS:SOUrces CH1CH2

Specifies Channel 1 and Channel 2 as the power analysis source.

POWerANALYSIS:SOUrces?

Might return CH1CH2.

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 181

*PSC

Sets and queries the power-on status flag that controls the automatic

power-on handling of the DESER, SRER, and ESER registers. When

*PSC is true, the DESER register is set to 255 and the SRER and

ESER registers are set to 0 at power on. When *PSC is false, the

current values in the DESER, SRER, and ESER registers are

preserved in nonvolatile memory when power is shut off and are

restored at power on. Refer to the Status and Events chapter on

page 3--1 for more information.

Status and Error

*PSC <NR1>

*PSC?

<NR1> = 0 sets the power-on status clear flag to false, disables the

power on clear, and allows the oscilloscope to possibly assert SRQ

after power on.

<NR1> ≠0 sets the power-on status clear flag true. Sending *PSC 1,

therefore, enables the power-on status clear and prevents any SRQ

assertion after power on.

*PSC 0

Sets the power-on status clear flag to false.

*PSC?

Might return the value 1, showing that the power-on status clear flag

is set to true.

DESE, *ESE, FACtory, *RST, *SRE

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Related Commands

Command Descriptions

2- 182 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

*RCL (Set Only)

Restores the state of the oscilloscope from a copy of its settings

stored in memory. (The settings are stored using the *SAV

command.) This command is equivalent to RECAll:SETUp, and

performs the same function as the Recall Saved Setup item in the

front-panel Save/Recall Setup menu.

Save and Recall

*RCL <NR1>

<NR1> is an integer value in the range from 1 to 5 (TDS200 series),

or 1 to 10 (TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and

TPS2000 series), and specifies a setup storage location.

*RCL 3

Restores the oscilloscope from a copy of the settings stored in

memory location 3.

FACtory, *LRN?, RECAll:SETUp, *RST, *SAV, SAVe:SETUp

RECAll:SETUp (Set Only)

Restores a stored or factory front-panel setup of the oscilloscope

from internal nonvolatile memory, or from a file on the Compact-

Flash card (TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series only), or on the USB

flash drive (TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only). When used with

the FACTORY argument, this command is equivalent to pushing the

DEFAULT SETUP front-panel button.

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Related Commands

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 183

Save and Recall

RECAll:SETUp { FACtory | <NR1> | <file path> }

FACtory selects the factory setup.

<NR1> is a value in the range from 1 to 5 (TDS200 series), or from 1

to 10 (TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000

series), and specifies a setup storage location.

<file path> (TDS2MEM, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000

series only) is a quoted string that defines the location and name of

the setup file to recall from the CompactFlash card or the USB flash

drive. If you do not specify a path to the folder, the TDS2MEM

looks for the file in the current working folder. The current folder

refers to the name of a folder as returned by the FILESystem:CWD

query.

RECAll:SETUp FACtory

Recalls the oscilloscope setup to its factory defaults.

RECAll:SETUp “A:\TSTSETUP\PRTST01.SET”

Recalls the oscilloscope settings from the file PRTST01.SET file on

the CompactFlash card (TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series only), or on

the USB flash drive (TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only).

FACtory, *RCL, *RST, *SAV, SAVe:SETUp

RECAll:WAVEForm (Set Only)

(TDS2MEM, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Series Only)

Recalls a stored waveform from the CompactFlash card (TDS2MEM

and TPS2000 series only), or from the USB flash drive (TDS1000B

and TDS2000B series only) into a reference location.

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Related Commands

Command Descriptions

2- 184 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Save and Recall

RECAll:WAVEForm <file path>,REF<x>

<file path> is a quoted string that defines the location and name

of the waveform file to recall. If you do not specify a path to the

folder, the oscilloscope looks for the file in the current working

folder. The current folder refers to the name of a folder as returned

by the FILESystem:CWD query.

REF<x> is the oscilloscope reference memory location in which to

load the waveform. You must load a saved waveform into a

reference memory location before displaying the waveform.

RECAll:WAVEForm “A:\TST--PRD\TST--01.CSV”, REFC

Loads the waveform file TST--01.CSV into reference memory RefC.

Then use SELect:REFC to display this waveform.

SAVe:WAVEForm, SELect:<wfm>

REM (Set Only)

Specifies a comment. This line is ignored by the oscilloscope.

Miscellaneous

REM <QString>

<QString> is a string that can have a maximum of 80 characters.

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 185

REM “This is a comment”

This command is ignored by the oscilloscope.

RS232? (Query Only)

(TDS200, TDS1000, TDS2000, and TPS2000 Series Only)

Returns the RS232 settings.

RS-232

RS232?

The current RS-232 settings

RS232?

Might return the following string:

:RS232:BAUD 9600; SOFTFLAGGING 0; HARDFLAGGING 1;

PARITY NONE; TRANSMIT:TERMINATOR LF

RS232:BAUd

(TDS200, TDS1000, TDS2000, and TPS2000 Series Only)

Sets or queries the RS-232C interface transmission speed. If no flow

control (flagging) is used, commands may be received faster than the

oscilloscope can process them. Also, if another command is sent

immediately after this command, without waiting for the baud rate to

be programmed, the first couple of characters may be lost.

RS-232

Examples

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Group

Command Descriptions

2- 186 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

RS232:BAUd <NR1>

RS232:BAUd?

<NR1> which can be 300,600,1200,2400,4800,9600,or 19200.

RS232:BAUd 9600

Sets the transmission rate to 9600 baud.

RS232:HARDFlagging

(TDS200, TDS1000, TDS2000, and TPS2000 Series Only)

Sets or queries the state of RS232 hard flagging. When hard flagging

is enabled, the oscilloscope sends data as long as CTS (Clear To

Send) is asserted. When receiving data, the oscilloscope asserts RTS

(Request To Send) until the input buffer is almost full. When the

oscilloscope no longer asserts RTS, it continues to read incoming

data until the input buffer is full and then reports an input overrun

error. The oscilloscope asserts DTR (Data Terminal Ready) at all

times when the oscilloscope power is on.

Hard flagging and soft flagging cannot be on at the same time.

However, hard and soft flagging can both be off at the same time.

Turning hard flagging on turns soft flagging off. Turning soft

flagging on turns hard flagging off.

RS-232

RS232:HARDFlagging { ON | OFF | <NR1> }

RS232:HARDFlagging?

ON or <NR1> ≠0 activates hard flagging and turns off soft flagging.

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 187

OFF or <NR1> = 0 deactivates hard flagging (RTS always asserted).

RS232:HARDFlagging ON

Activates hard flagging and deactivates soft flagging.

RS232:PARity

(TDS200, TDS1000, TDS2000, and TPS2000 Series Only)

Sets or queries the parity used for all RS-232C data transfers. When

parity is odd or even, the oscilloscope generates the selected parity

on output and checks all input against the selected parity. When

parity is none, the oscilloscope performs no input parity error checks

and generates no output parity.

When the parity (ninth) bit does not match the parity type, the

oscilloscope reports a parity error. If another command is sent

immediately after this command, without waiting for the parity to be

programmed, the first few characters may be lost.

RS-232

RS232:PARity { EVEN | ODD | NONe }

RS232:PARity?

EVEN sets even parity.

ODD sets odd parity.

NONe sets no parity (no ninth bit transmitted).

Examples

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Command Descriptions

2- 188 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

RS232:PARity EVEN\

Sets even parity.

RS232:SOFTFlagging

(TDS200, TDS1000, TDS2000, and TPS2000 Series Only)

Sets or queries the input and output soft flagging over the RS-232C

port. After receiving an XOFF (DC3), the oscilloscope sends two or

less characters. The oscilloscope begins transmitting data again when

it receives an XON (DC1) character.

The oscilloscope sends an XOFF character when its input buffer is

running out of space. After sending an XOFF character it can receive

at least 20 more bytes. It sends XON when its input buffer has an

acceptable number of free bytes.

When soft flagging is enabled and binary data is transferred, data

transmission will lock up if the data contains XOFF or XON

characters.

Hard flagging and soft flagging cannot be active at the same time.

However, hard and soft flagging can both be inactive at the same

time. Activating soft flagging deactivates hard flagging. Activating

hard flagging deactivates soft flagging.

RS-232

RS232:SOFTFlagging { ON | OFF | <NR1> }

RS232:SOFTFlagging?

ON or NR1 ≠0 activates soft flagging and deactivates hard flagging.

OFF or NR1 = 0 deactivates soft flagging.

Examples

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 189

RS232:SOFTFlagging ON

Activates soft flagging and deactivates hard flagging.

RS232:TRANsmit:TERMinator

(TDS200, TDS1000, TDS2000, and TPS2000 Series Only)

Sets or queries the end-of-line (EOL) terminator. When transmitting,

the oscilloscope appends the terminator to the end of each message.

When receiving, the oscilloscope accepts all four terminators,

regardless of the currently selected terminator. When a combination

of multiple characters is selected (CRLF or LFCR), the oscilloscope

interprets the first character as the terminator; it treats the second

character as a null command.

CR represents an ASCII carriage return character (0x0D) and LF

represents an ASCII linefeed character (0x0A).

RS-232

RS232:TRANsmit:TERMinator { CR | LF | CRLf | LFCr }

RS232:TRANsmit:TERMinator?

CR selects the carriage return character as the EOL terminator.

LF selects the line feed character as the EOL terminator.

CRLf selects the carriage return and line feed characters as the EOL

terminator.

LFCr selects the line feed and carriage return characters as the EOL

terminator.

RS232:TRANsmit:TERMinator CR

Sets the carriage return as the EOL terminator.

Examples

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Command Descriptions

2- 190 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

*RST (Set Only)

(Reset) Returns the oscilloscope to a known set of oscilloscope

settings, but does not purge any stored settings. This command

executes a subset of the FACtory command.

Status and Error

*RST

Sending the *RST command does the following:

HReturns the oscilloscope settings to the factory defaults (refer to

Appendix B: Factory Setup)

HSets the macro defined by *DDT to a zero-length field

HClears the pending operation flag and associated operations

The *RST command does not alter the following items:

HState of the RS-232, GPIB, or USB interface

HCalibration data that affects device specifications

HCurrent GPIB oscilloscope address

HStored settings or waveforms

HOutput queue

HService Request Enable Register settings

HStandard Event Status Enable Register settings

HPower-On Status Clear flag setting

HHard copy parameters

HResponse Header Enable State

HFront panel LOCK state

HVerbose State

HDisplay Brightness, TPS2000 series only

Group

Syntax

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 191

HDisplay Contrast (TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B,

and TPS2000 series only)

FACtory, *PSC, *RCL, RECAll:SETUp, *SAV, SAVe:SETUp

*SAV (Set Only)

(Save) Stores the state of the oscilloscope into a specified nonvola-

tile memory location. You can later use the *RCL command to

restore the oscilloscope to this saved state. This is equivalent to

selecting the Save Setup option in the Save/Recall Setup menu.

Save and Recall

*SAV <NR1>

<NR1> is an integer value in the range from 1 to 5 (TDS200 series) or

from 1 to 10 (TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and

TPS2000 series) and specifies a memory location. Any settings that

have been stored previously at this location are overwritten.

*SAV 2

Saves the current settings in memory location 2.

FACtory, *RCL, RECAll:SETUp, SAVe:SETUp

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Related Commands

Command Descriptions

2- 192 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

SAVe:IMAge (Set Only)

(TDS2MEM, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Series Only)

Saves the screen image to a file on the CompactFlash card

(TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series only), or on the USB flash drive

(TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only).

Save and Recall

SAVe:IMAge <file path>

<file path> is a quoted string that defines the path and name of the

screen image file to save. Use file name extensions that are

appropriate for image format. If you do not specify a path to a folder,

the oscilloscope saves the screen image file in the current working

folder, using the current save image file format. The current folder

refers to the name of a folder as returned by the FILESystem:CWD

query.

Use the SAVe:IMAge:FILEFormat command to set the screen image

graphical file format.

SAVe:IMAge “A:\PROD-TST\VID-EVAL.BMP”

Saves the screen image to the file VID-EVAL.BMP in the folder

A:\PROD-TST on the CompactFlash card (TDS2MEM and TPS2000

series only), or on the USB flash drive (TDS1000B and TDS2000B

series only).

SAVe:IMAge:FILEFormat

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Related Commands

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 193

SAVe:IMAge:FILEFormat

(TDS2MEM, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Series Only)

Sets the screen image file format used by the SAVe:IMAGE

command and by the SAVE > Action > Save Image and SAVE >

Action > Save All front-panel operations.

Save and Recall

SAVe:IMAge:FILEFormat {BMP | EPSIMAGE | JPG | PCX | RLE

| TIFF}

BMP sets the screen image file format to Microsoft Windows Bitmap

format.

EPSIMAGE sets the screen image file format to Postscript format.

JPG (TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only) sets the screen image

file format to JPEG bitmap (uses a lossy file compression algorithm).

PCX sets the screen image file format to DOS Paintbrush format.

RLE sets the screen image file format to Windows color image file

format (*.RLE). Use RLE for faster transfer rates and smaller

resulting files. Many programs that recognize .BMP files also

recognize .RLE files.

TIFF sets the screen image file format to Tagged Image File Format.

SAVe:IMAge:FILEFormat TIFF

Sets the screen image graphical file format to TIFF.

S AVe : IM Ag e

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Related Commands

Command Descriptions

2- 194 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

SAVe:SETUp (Set Only)

Saves the current state of the oscilloscope into the specified

nonvolatile memory location, or to a file on the CompactFlash card

(TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series only), or on the USB flash drive

(TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only). This is equivalent to

selecting the Save Setup option in the Save/Recall Setup menu.

Save and Recall

SAVe:SETUp {<NR1> | <file path>}

<NR1> is an integer value in the range from 1 to 5 (TDS200 series),

or 1 to 10 (TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and

TPS2000 series), and specifies a memory location. Any settings that

have been stored previously at this location are overwritten.

<file path> (TDS2MEM, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000

series only) is a quoted string that defines the path and name of the

setup file to save. Use the extension .SET for oscilloscope setup file

names.

If you do not specify a path to a folder, the TDS2MEM saves the

setup file in the current working folder. The current folder refers to

the name of a folder as returned by the FILESystem:CWD query.

SAVe:SETUp 5

Saves the current front-panel setup to memory location 5.

SAVe:SETUp “A:\PROD-TST\VID-EVAL.SET”

Saves the oscilloscope settings to the file VID-EVAL.SET in the folder

A:\PROD-TST on the CompactFlash card (TDS2MEM and TPS2000

series only), or on the USB flash drive (TDS1000B and TDS2000B

series only).

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 195

RECAll:SETUp, *RCL, *SAV

SAVe:WAVEform (Set Only)

Stores a waveform in one of the nonvolatile reference memory

locations, or to a file on the CompactFlash card (TDS2MEM and

TPS2000 series only), or on the USB flash drive (TDS1000B and

TDS2000B series only). This command is equivalent to selecting the

Save Waveform option in the Save/Recall Waveform menu.

Save and Recall

SAVe:WAVEform <wfm>, {REF<x> | <file path>}

<wfm> is CH<y> (one of the allowable channels) or MATH.Thisisthe

waveform that will be saved. For TDS2MEM module and TPS2000

series, <wfm> can also be a reference waveform location (for

example REF4) if the destination is <file path>.

REF<x> is one of the allowable reference waveform storage

locations.

<file path> (TDS2MEM, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000

series only) is a quoted string that defines the path and name of the

waveform file to save on the CompactFlash card (TDS2MEM and

TPS2000 series only), or on the USB flash drive (TDS1000B and

TDS2000B series only). Use the extension .CSV for saved waveform

files. Waveform data is saved as self-documented comma-separated

ASCII values.

If you do not specify a path to a folder, the TDS2MEM creates the

waveform file in the current working folder. The current folder refers

to the name of a folder as returned by the FILESystem:CWD query.

SAVe:WAVEform MATH, REFB

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Command Descriptions

2- 196 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Saves the math waveform in stored waveform memory location

REFB.

SAVe:WAVEform CH1, “A:\PROD-TST\FRQTST03.CSV”

Saves the channel 1 waveform data to the file FRQTST03.CSV in the

folder A:\PROD-TST on the CompactFlash card (TDS2MEM and

TPS2000 series only), or on the USB flash drive (TDS1000B and

TDS2000B series only).

SELect:<wfm> can be used to display a saved reference waveform.

SELect? (Query Only)

Returns the display status of all waveforms.

Vertical

SELect?

Waveform display status

SELect?

2-channel models with CH2, Math and REFB waveforms displayed

would return :SELECT:CH1 0;CH2 1;MATH 1;REFA 0;REFB 1

4-channel models with CH1 through CH4 displayed, Math disabled,

REFA displayed, and REFD displayed would return

:SELECT:CH1 1;CH2 1;CH3 1;CH4 1;MATH 0;REFA 1;REFB

0;REFC 0;REFD 1

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 197

SELect:<wfm>

Controls the display of waveforms. This command is equivalent to

activating or deactivating a waveform from the oscilloscope front

panel.

Vertical

SELect:<wfm> { OFF | ON | <NR1> }

SELect:<wfm>?

OFF or <NR1> = 0 deactivates the display of the specified waveform.

ON or <NR1> ≠0 activates the display of the specified waveform.

<wfm> can be CH<x>,MATH,orREF<y>. Refer to Constructed

Mnemonics on page 2--9 for more information.

SELect:CH2 ON

Displays channel 2.

SELect:REFA?

Returns either 0or 1, indicating whether the REFA waveform is

displayed.

SET? (Query Only)

Returns most oscilloscope settings. You can send these responses

back to the oscilloscope to return the oscilloscope to the state it was

in when you sent SET?. This query is identical to the *LRN? query.

Miscellaneous

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Group

Command Descriptions

2- 198 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

SET?

NOTE. The SET? query always returns command headers, regardless

of the setting of the HEADer command. This is because the returned

data is intended to be able to be sent back to the oscilloscope as

concatenated commands. The VERBose command can still be used to

specify whether the returned headers should be abbreviated or full

length.

Most oscilloscope settings. See Appendix B: Factory Setup.

SET?

A partial return string may look like the following:

:ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER RUNSTOP;STATE 1;MODE SAMPLE;

NUMAVG 16;:HEADER 1;:VERBOSE 1;:DISPLAY:FORMAT YT;STYLE

VECTORS;PERSISTENCE 500.0E–3;CONTRAST 50;:LOCK

NONE;:HARDCOPY:FORMAT EPSON;PORT RS232;LAYOUT PORTRAIT;

HEADer, *LRN?, VERBose

*SRE

(Service Request Enable) sets and queries the bits in the Service

Request Enable Register (SRER). Refer to the Status and Events

chapter on page 3--1 for more information.

Status and Error

*SRE <NR1>

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 199

*SRE?

<NR1> is an integer value in the range from 0 to 255. The binary bits

of the SRER are set according to this value. Using an out-of-range

value causes an execution error. The power-on default for SRER is 0

if *PSC is 1. If *PSC is 0, the SRER maintains its value through a

power cycle.

*SRE 48

Sets the bits in the SRER to 00110000 binary.

*SRE?

Might return a value of 32, showing that the bits in the SRER have

the binary value 00100000.

*CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMSg?, FACtory, *PSC,

*STB?

*STB? (Query Only)

(Read Status Byte) query returns the contents of the Status Byte

to the Status and Events chapter on page 3--1 for more information.

Status and Error

*STB?

<NR1>

Arguments

Examples

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Returns

Command Descriptions

2- 200 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

*STB?

Might return the value 96, showing that the SBR contains the binary

value 01100000.

*CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMSg?, FACtory, *SRE

SWLoss? (Query only)

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Returns the current Switching Loss measurement settings.

Power Measurement

SWLoss?

Might return the following:

:SWLOSS:ACQUIRE CONTINUOUS;ENABLE ON;SOURCES

CH1CH2;STOPAFTER 10 ;TONSTART 90;TONEND 10;TOFFSTART

10;TOFFEND 10;VSAT 4.300000190735E0;UNITS WATTS

SWLoss:ACQuire

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Sets or queries the type of acquisition used for Switching Loss

measurements.

Power Measurement

Examples

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Examples

Group

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 201

SWLoss:ACQuire { STOPAfter | CONTINUOUS }

SWLoss:ACQuire?

STOPAfter instructs the oscilloscope to perform measurements on N

acquisitions and then stop.

CONTINUOUS instructs the oscilloscope to continuously acquire

waveforms and display measurements.

SWLoss:ACQuire?

Might return SWLOSS:ACQUIRE CONTINUOUS, indicating that the

oscilloscope is continuously taking switching loss measurements.

SWLoss:STOPAfter

SWLoss:AVErage:CONDUCTION? (Query Only)

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Returns the power loss of the device under test when the device is

conducting in its on state. The oscilloscope reports this measurement

in the Avg. column of the Switching Loss display.

You must enter the saturation voltage of the device under test using

the SWLoss:VSAT command.

NOTE. This command returns error 221 (settings conflict) if the

Switching Loss menu is not active.

Power Measurement

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Related Commands

Group

Command Descriptions

2- 202 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

SWLoss:AVErage:CONDUCTION?

<NR3>

SWLoss:AVErage:CONDUCTION?

Might return 6.0880498608E-2.

SWLoss:AVErage:N? (Query Only)

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Returns the number of measurements used to calculate the AVG.

(averaged) measurement value for switching loss measurements.

NOTE. This command returns error 221 (settings conflict) if the

Switching Loss menu is not active.

Power Measurement

SWLoss:AVErage:N?

<NR1>

SWLoss:AVErage:N?

Might return 185, indicating that the oscilloscope used 185

measurements to calculate the average.

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 203

SWLoss:AVErage:TOTAL? (Query Only)

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Returns the sum of the Turn-On, Turn-Off, and Conduction

switching losses. The oscilloscope reports this measurement in the

Avg column of the Switching Loss display.

NOTE. This command returns error 221 (settings conflict) if the

Switching Loss menu is not active.

Power Measurement

SWLoss:AVErage:TOTAL?

<NR3>

SWLoss:AVErage:TOTAL?

Might return 9.1715589532E-2.

SWLoss:AVErage:TURNOFF? (Query Only)

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Returns the power loss of the device under test when the device is

transitioning between its on and off state. The oscilloscope reports

this measurement in the Avg column of the Switching Loss display.

You must enter the saturation voltage of the device under test using

the SWLoss:VSAT command.

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Command Descriptions

2- 204 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

NOTE. This command returns error 221 (settings conflict) if the

Switching Loss menu is not active.

Power Measurement

SWLoss:AVErage:TURNOFF?

<NR3>

SWLoss:AVErage:TURNOFF?

Might return 1.3790115628E-- 2 .

SWLoss:AVErage:TURNON? (Query Only)

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Returns the power loss of the device under test when the device is

transitioning between its off and on state. The oscilloscope reports

this measurement in the Avg column of the Switching Loss display.

You must enter the saturation voltage of the device under test using

the SWLoss:VSAT command.

NOTE. This command returns error 221 (settings conflict) if the

Switching Loss menu is not active.

Power Measurement

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Group

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 205

SWLoss:AVErage:TURNON?

<NR3>

SWLoss:AVErage:TURNON?

Might return 1.698264356E-2.

SWLoss:ENABLe

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Sets or queries the switching loss menu, on or off.

Power Measurement

SWLoss:ENABLe { ON | OFF }

SWLoss:ENABLe?

ON enables the switching loss menu.

OFF disables the switching loss menu.

SWLoss:ENABLe ON

Sets the switching loss measurement to on.

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Command Descriptions

2- 206 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

SWLoss:LEVELS (Set Only)

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Returns the Switching Loss measurement levels to factory default

values for the following commands:

SWLoss:TONSTART

SWLoss:TONEND

SWLoss:TOFFSTART

SWLoss:TOFFEND

Power Measurement

SWLoss:LEVELS { DEFault }

DEFault sets Switching Loss measurement levels to default values.

SWLoss:LEVELS DEFault

Returns Switching Loss measurement levels to default values.

SWLoss:LOG:CONDUCTION? (Query Only)

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Returns the Conduction Loss for the switching loss measurement

specified by the SWLoss:LOG:INDEX command.

NOTE. The oscilloscope generates error 221 if the SWLoss:LOG:IN-

DEX? command returns a number greater than that reported by

SWLoss:AVErage:N? This indicates that insufficient measurements

have been taken to generate a log report.

Group

SyntaxSyntax

Arguments

Examples

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 207

Power Measurement

SWLoss:LOG:CONDUCTION?

<NR3>

SWLoss:LOG:CONDUCTION?

Might return 6.0524113476E-2.

SWLoss:LOG:INDEX

SWLoss:LOG:TOTAL?

SWLoss:LOG:TURNON?

SWLoss:LOG:TUNROFF?

SWLoss:LOG:INDEX

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Sets or queries which measurement to return for the following

commands: SWLoss:LOG:CONDUCTION?, SWLoss:LOG:TO-

TAL?, SWLoss:LOG:TURNON?, and SWLoss:LOG:TURNOFF?.

NOTE. The SWLoss:AVErage:N? command returns the number of

measurements currently accumulated in the log.

Power Measurement

SWLoss:LOG:INDEX <NR1>

SWLoss:LOG:INDEX?

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Command Descriptions

2- 208 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

<NR1> The default value is 1.

SWLoss:LOG:INDEX?

Might return 5.

SWLoss:LOG:TOTAL? (Query Only)

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Returns the Total Loss for a switching loss measurement specified by

the SWLoss:LOG:INDEX command.

NOTE. The oscilloscope generates error 221 if the SWLoss:LOG:IN-

DEX? command returns a number greater than that reported by

SWLoss:AVErage:N? This indicates that insufficient measurements

have been taken to generate a log report.

Power Measurement

SWLoss:LOG:TOTAL?

<NR3>

SWLoss:LOG:TOTAL?

Might return 9.0796045959E-2.

SWLoss:LOG:INDEX

SWLoss:LOGCONDUCTION?

Arguments

Examples

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Related Commands

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 209

SWLoss:LOG:TURNON?

SWLoss:LOG:TUNRNOFF?

SWLoss:LOG:TURNOFF? (Query Only)

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Returns the Turn-Off Loss for a switching loss measurement

specified by the SWLoss:LOG:INDEX command.

NOTE. The oscilloscope generates error 221 if the SWLoss:LOG:IN-

DEX? command returns a number greater than that reported by

SWLoss:AVErage:N? This indicates that insufficient measurements

have been taken to generate a log report.

Power Measurement

SWLoss:LOG:TUNROFF?

<NR3>

SWLoss:LOG:TUNROFF?

Might return 1.3477193192E-2.

SWLoss:LOG:INDEX

SWLoss:LOGCONDUCTION?

SWLoss:LOG:TURNON?

SWLoss:LOG:TOTAL?

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Related Commands

Command Descriptions

2- 210 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

SWLoss:LOG:TURNON? (Query Only)

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Returns the Turn-On Loss for a switching loss measurement

specified by the SWLoss:LOG:INDEX command.

NOTE. The oscilloscope generates error 221 if the SWLoss:LOG:IN-

DEX? command returns a number greater than that reported by

SWLoss:AVErage:N? This indicates that insufficient measurements

have been taken to generate a log report.

Power Measurement

SWLoss:LOG:TURNON?

<NR3>

SWLoss:LOG:TURNON?

Might return 1.7111644149E-2.

SWLoss:LOG:INDEX

SWLoss:LOGCONDUCTION?

SWLoss:LOG:TURNOFF?

SWLoss:LOG:TOTAL?

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Related Commands

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2-211

SWLoss:SAVE

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Saves the Switching Loss measurements to the oscilloscope

CompactFlash card. Uses .CSV format.

NOTE. You can view the contents of the saved file on your personal

computer. You cannot recall saved Switching Loss files to the

oscilloscope.

Power Measurement

SWLoss:SAVE <filename>

SWLoss:SAVE?

<filename> specifies the file name and full path to save switching

loss measurement data.

SWLoss:SAVE “A:\Data2.CSV”

Specifies the file name and path to save switching loss measurement

data to the oscilloscope CompactFlash card.

SWLoss:SOURCES

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Sets or queries the input sources for Switching Loss measurements.

Before taking measurements, you must use the CH<x>:YUNit

command to set the units of the voltage and current sources.

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Command Descriptions

2- 212 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Power Measurement

SWLoss:SOURCES { CH1CH2 | CH3CH4 }

SWLoss:SOURCES?

CH1CH2 specifies Channel 1 and Channel 2 as the input sources.

CH3CH4 specifies Channel 3 and Channel 4 as the input sources.

NOTE. The “CH3CH4” argument is only valid for instruments with

four channels.

SWLoss:SOURCES?

Might return CH1CH2.

CH<x>:YUNit

SWLoss:STOPAfter

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Sets or queries the number of measurements used for Switching Loss

measurement.

Power Measurement

SWLoss:STOPafter <NR1>

SWLoss:STOPafter?

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 213

<NR1> defines the number of measurements you want to include.

SWLoss:STOPafter?

Might return 15, indicating that the oscilloscope will take fifteen

measurements and stop.

SWLoss:ACQuire

SWLoss:TOFFEND

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Sets or queries a level on the first falling edge of the current

waveform that occurs after the turn-off start point (SWLoss:TOFF-

START).

The Turn-Off loss measurement is calculated by integrating the math

waveform between the turn-off start (SWLoss:TOFFSTART) and

turn-off end (SWLoss:TOFFEND) points.

Power Measurement

SWLoss:TOFFEND <NR1>

SWLoss:TOFFEND?

<NR1> in percent. Default value is 10.

SWLoss:TOFFEND?

Might return 10, indicating that Switching Loss Turn-off End is set

to 10%.

Arguments

Examples

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Command Descriptions

2- 214 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

SWLoss:TOFFSTART

SWLoss:TONSTART

SWLoss:TONEND

SWLoss:LEVELS

SWLoss:TONEND

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Sets or queries a level on the first falling edge of the voltage

waveform.

The Turn-On loss measurement is calculated by integrating the math

waveform between the turn-on start (SWLoss:TONSTART) and

turn-on end (SWLoss:TONEND) points.

Power Measurement

SWLoss:TONEND <NR1>

SWLoss:TONEND?

<NR1> in percent. Default value is 10.

SWLoss:TONEND?

Might return 10, indicating that Switching Loss Turn-off Start is set

to 10%.

SWLoss:TONSTART

SWLoss:TOFFSTART

SWLoss:TOFFEND

SWLoss:LEVELS

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Related Commands

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 215

SWLoss:TOFFSTART

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Sets or queries a level on the rising edge of the voltage waveform.

The Turn-Off loss measurement is calculated by integrating the math

waveform between the turn-off start (SWLoss:TOFFSTART) and

turn-off end (SWLoss:TOFFEND) points.

Power Measurement

SWLoss:TOFFSTART <NR1>

SWLoss:TOFFSTART?

<NR1> in percent. Default value is 10.

SWLoss:TOFFSTART?

Might return 10, indicating that Switching Loss Turn-on End is set to

10%.

SWLoss:TOFFEND

SWLoss:TONSTART

SWLoss:TONEND

SWLoss:LEVELS

SWLoss:TONSTART

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Sets or queries a level on the falling edge of the voltage waveform.

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Related Commands

Command Descriptions

2- 216 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

The Turn-On loss measurement is calculated by integrating the math

waveform between the turn-on start (SWLoss:TONSTART) and

turn-on end (SWLoss:TONEND) points.

Power Measurement

SWLoss:TONSTART <NR1>

SWLoss:TONSTART?

<NR1> in percent. Default value is 90.

SWLoss:TONSTART?

Might return 80, indicating that Switching Loss Turn-on Start is set

to 80%.

SWLoss:TONEND

SWLoss:TOFFSTART

SWLoss:TOFFEND

SWLoss:LEVELS

SWLoss:UNITs

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Sets or queries the units for Switching Loss measurements.

Power Measurement

SWLoss:UNITs { WATTS | JOULES }

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 217

SWLoss:UNITs?

WATTS sets the measurement units to Watts.

JOULES sets the measurement units to Joules.

SWLoss:UNITs?

Might return WATTS, indicating that the current measurement units

are Watts.

NOTE. If the units are Watts, the trigger type must be Edge and the

trigger source must be a channel specified by SWLoss:SOURCES.

SWLoss:VALue:CONDUCTION? (Query Only)

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Returns the power loss of the device under test when the device is

conducting in its on state. You must enter the saturation voltage of

the device under test using the SWLoss:VSAT command.

This command returns an immediate-measurement value that does

not depend of the current oscilloscope menu.

Power Measurement

SWLoss:VALue:CONDUCTION?

<NR3>

Arguments

Examples

Group

Syntax

Returns

Command Descriptions

2- 218 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

SWLoss:VALue:CONDUCTION?

Might return 6.0166666667E-2.

SWLoss:VALue:TOTAL? (Query Only)

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Returns the sum of the Turn-On, Turn-Off, and Conduction

switching losses.

This command returns an immediate-measurement value that does

not depend of the current oscilloscope menu.

Power Measurement

SWLoss:VALue:TOTAL?

<NR3>

SWLoss:VALue:TOTAL?

Might return

SWLoss:VALue:TURNOFF? (Query Only)

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Returns the power loss of the device under test when the device is

transitioning between its on and off state. You must enter the

saturation voltage of the device under test using the SWLoss:VSAT

command.

This command returns an immediate-measurement value that does

not depend of the current oscilloscope menu.

Returns

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 219

Power Measurement

SWLoss:VALue:TURNOFF?

<NR3>

SWLoss:VALue:TURNOFF?

Might return

SWLoss:VALue:TURNON?

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Returns the power loss of the device under test when the device is

transitioning between its off and on state. You must enter the

saturation voltage of the device under test using the SWLoss:VSAT

command.

This command returns an immediate-measurement value that does

not depend of the current oscilloscope menu.

Power Measurement

SWLoss:VALue:TURNON?

<NR3>

SWLoss:VALue:TURNON?

Might return

Group

Syntax

Returns

ExamplesSyntax

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Command Descriptions

2- 220 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

SWLoss:VSAT

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Sets or queries the saturation voltage for the device under test.

Power Measurement

SWLoss:VSAT <NR3>

SWLoss:VSAT?

<NR3> specifies the saturation voltage.

SWLoss:VSAT?

Might return 4.800000667572E0, indicating that the saturation

voltage is set to 4.80 volts.

TIMe

(TDS2MEM, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Series Only)

Sets or queries the oscilloscope time value. The oscilloscope uses the

time and date values to time stamp files saved to the CompactFlash

card (TDS2MEM and TPS2000 series only), or to the USB flash

drive (TDS1000B and TDS2000B series only), as well as show the

time and date on the oscilloscope display.

Miscellaneous

DATE <QString>

DATE?

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Group

Syntax

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 221

<QString> is a time in the form “hh:mm:ss”, based on a 24-hour

clock (00:00:00 through 23:59:59).

TIMe “14:45:00”

Sets the time to 2:45 pm.

DATE

*TRG (Set Only)

(Trigger) Executes commands that are defined by *DDT.

Miscellaneous

*TRG

Immediately executes all commands defined by *DDT.

*DDT

TRIGger

Forces a trigger event to occur. When used as a query, TRIGger?

returns the current trigger settings.

Trigger

Arguments

Examples

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Examples

Related Commands

Group

Command Descriptions

2- 222 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

TRIGger FORCe

TRIGger?

FORCe creates a trigger event. If TRIGger:STATE is REAdy, the

acquisition will complete; otherwise this command will be ignored.

This is equivalent to selecting FORCE TRIG on the front panel.

TRIGger FORCe

Forces a trigger event to occur.

TRIGger?

Might return the following string:

:TRIGGER:MAIN:MODE AUTO;TYPE EDGE;LEVEL 0.0E0;HOLD-

OFF:VALUE 5.0E–7;:TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:SOURCE CH1;COUPLING

DC;SLOPE RISE;:TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SOURCE CH1;SYNC

FIELD;POLARITY NORMAL

TRIGger:MAIn

Sets the oscilloscope trigger level to 50% of the minimum and

maximum values of the signal. Returns the current main trigger

settings when used as a query.

Trigger

TRIGger:MAIn SETLevel

TRIGger:MAIn?

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Group

Syntax

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 223

SETLevel sets the main trigger level to half way between the MIN

and MAX amplitudes of the trigger source input. This is equivalent

to pressing the front-panel SET LEVEL TO 50% button.

If the oscilloscope acquisition state is STOP and you send

TRIGger:MAIn SETLevel, the oscilloscope ignores the command

and generates event 221 (Settings conflict).

TRIGger:MAIn SETLEVel

Sets the main trigger level mid way between MAX and MIN.

TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE? (Query Only)

Returns the trigger coupling, source, and slope settings for the edge

trigger.

Trigger

TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE?

Trigger coupling, source, and slope settings for the main edge trigger

TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE?

Might return SOURCE CH1;COUPLING DC;SLOPE RISE

TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:COUPling

Sets or queries the type of coupling for the edge trigger. This is

equivalent to setting the Coupling option in the Trigger menu.

Arguments

Examples

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Command Descriptions

2- 224 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Trigger

TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:COUPling { AC | DC | HFRej | LFRej |

NOISErej }

TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:COUPling?

AC selects AC trigger coupling.

DC selects DC coupling.

HFRej coupling removes the high-frequency components of the DC

signal.

LFRej coupling removes the low-frequency components of the AC

signal.

NOISErej selects DC low sensitivity. It requires added signal

amplitude for more stable, less false triggering.

TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:COUPling DC

Sets the main edge trigger coupling to DC.

TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SLOpe

Selects a rising or falling slope for the edge trigger. This is

equivalent to setting the Slope option in the Trigger menu.

Trigger

TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SLOpe { FALL | RISe }

TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SLOpe?

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Group

Syntax

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 225

FALL specifies to trigger on the falling or negative edge of a signal.

RISe specifies to trigger on the rising or positive edge of a signal.

TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SLOpe RISE

Sets the main edge trigger to occur on the rising slope.

TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SOUrce

Sets or queries the source for the edge trigger. This is equivalent to

setting the Source option in the Trigger menu.

Trigger

TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SOUrce { CH<x> | EXT | EXT5 | EXT10 |

AC LINE }

TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SOUrce?

CH<x> specifies one of the allowable input channels. The value of

<x> can vary from 1 through 4 for 4-channel instruments or 1

through 2 for 2-channel instruments.

EXT specifies the external input (not available with TDS224

oscilloscopes).

EXT5 specifies that the external input is attenuated by a factor of 5

(not available with TDS224 oscilloscopes).

EXT10 specifies that the external input is attenuated by a factor of 10

(TPS2000 series only).

AC LINE specifies the power line signal as a trigger source (not

available with TPS2000 series oscilloscopes).

Arguments

Examples

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Command Descriptions

2- 226 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SOUrce CH1

Specifies channel 1 as the edge trigger source.

TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SOUrce?

Might return CH2 for the edge trigger source.

TRIGger:MAIn:FREQuency? (Query Only)

(TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Series

Only)

Returns the edge or pulse width trigger frequency. This is the same

as the readout in the lower right corner of the screen.

If the trigger frequency is less than 10 Hz, the query returns 9.9e37

and generates error 2207 (Measurement error, Measurement

overflow).

If the trigger type is video, the query returns 9.9e37 and generates

event 221 (Settings conflict).

Trigger

TRIGger:MAIn:FREQuency?

Edge or pulse width trigger frequency

TRIGger:MAIn:FREQuency?

Might return :TRIGGER:MAIN:FREQUENCY 1.0E3

MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue?

Examples

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Related Commands

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 227

TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff? (Query Only)

Returns the trigger holdoff value.

Trigger

TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff?

Main trigger holdoff value

TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff?

Might return :TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF:VALUE 5.0E-7

TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:VALue

Sets or queries the oscilloscope trigger holdoff value.

Trigger

TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:VALue <NR3>

TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:VALue?

<NR3> is the main trigger holdoff value. The range is 500 ns to 10 s.

TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:VALue 10

Sets the holdoff value to 10s.

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Command Descriptions

2- 228 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

TRIGger:MAIn:LEVel

Sets the oscilloscope edge (all models) and pulse width (TDS1000,

TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 series only) trigger

level. This command is equivalent to adjusting the front-panel

TRIGGER LEVEL knob.

NOTE. When the edge trigger source is set to AC LINE, the

oscilloscope ignores the set form of the command and generates

event 221 (Settings conflict).

When the edge trigger source is set to AC LINE, the query form of

the command returns zero.

Trigger

TRIGger:MAIn:LEVel <NR3>

TRIGger:MAIn:LEVel?

<NR3> the main trigger level, in volts.

TRIGger:MAIn:LEVel?

Might return 1.4, indicating that the main edge trigger is set to

1.4 V.

TRIGger:MAIn:MODe

Sets or queries the trigger mode for the Edge (all models) and Pulse

width (TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000

series only) trigger types.

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 229

Trigger

TRIGger:MAIn:MODe { AUTO | NORMal }

TRIGger:MAIn:MODe?

AUTO generates a trigger if a trigger is not detected within a specific

time period. AUTO also enables scan mode for sweep speeds of

100 ms/div and slower.

NORMal waits for a valid trigger event.

TRIGger:MAIn:MODe AUTO

Specifies that a trigger event is automatically generated.

ACQuire:STOPAfter

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse? (Query Only)

(TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Series

Only)

Returns the current Pulse Trigger settings.

Trigger

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse?

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Command Descriptions

2- 230 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse?

Might return the following string:

:TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SOURCE CH1;WIDTH:POLARITY POS-

ITIVE;WHEN EQUAL;WIDTH 1.0E-3

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SOUrce

(TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Series

Only)

Sets or queries the source for the pulse trigger. This is equivalent to

setting the Source option in the Trigger menu.

Trigger

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SOUrce

{ CH<x> | EXT | EXT5 | EXT10 }

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SOUrce?

CH<x> specifies one of the allowable input channels. The value of

<x> can be 1 through 4 on four channel oscilloscopes, or 1 or 2 on

two channel oscilloscopes.

EXT specifies the external input (not available with TDS224

oscilloscopes).

EXT5 specifies the external input attenuated by a factor of 5 (not

available with TDS224 oscilloscopes).

EXT10 specifies the external input attenuated by a factor of 10

(TPS2000 series only).

Examples

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 231

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth? (Query Only)

(TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Series

Only)

Returns the pulse trigger width settings.

Trigger

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth?

Might return the following string:

:TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH:POLARITY POSITIVE;WHEN

EQUAL;WIDTH 1.0E-3

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:POLarity

(TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Series

Only)

Sets or queries the polarity for the pulse trigger. This is equivalent to

setting the Polarity option in the Pulse Trigger menu.

Trigger

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:POLarity

{ POSITIVe | NEGAtive }

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:POLarity?

Group

Syntax

Examples

Group

Syntax

Command Descriptions

2- 232 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Positive polarity specifics pulses with a rising leading edge. Negative

polarity specifies pulses with a falling leading edge.

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:WHEN

(TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Series

Only)

Sets or queries the trigger conditions for the pulse trigger. This is

equivalent to setting the When option in the Pulse Trigger menu.

Trigger

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:WHEN

{ EQual | NOTEqual | INside | OUTside }

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:WHEN?

EQual triggers on the trailing edge of pulses of the specified width.

NOTEQual triggers when a pulse’s trailing edge occurs before the

specified width, or a pulse continues longer than the specified width

without a trailing edge.

INside (less than) triggers on the trailing edge of any pulses that are

narrower than the specified width.

OUTside (greater than; also called time-out trigger) triggers when a

pulse continues longer that the specified width.

Arguments

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 233

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:WIDth

(TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Series

Only)

Sets or queries the width for the pulse trigger. This is equivalent to

setting the Width option by using the Pulse Trigger menu and the

TRIGGER knob.

Trigger

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:WIDth <NR3>

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:WIDth?

Time, in seconds. Range is 33 ns to 10 s. Resolution varies. Value is

forced to nearest achievable value.

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:WIDth .000000123

followed by TRIGGER:MAIN:PULse:WIDth:WIDth?

Might return 1.155E-7.

TRIGger:MAIn:TYPe

Sets or queries the type of oscilloscope trigger. This is equivalent to

setting the Type option in the Trigger menu.

Trigger

TRIGger:MAIn:TYPe { EDGE | VIDeo | PULse }

TRIGger:MAIn:TYPe?

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Group

Syntax

Command Descriptions

2- 234 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

EDGE is a normal trigger. A trigger event occurs when a signal passes

through a specified voltage level in the specified direction and is

controlled by the TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE commands.

VIDeo specifies that a trigger occurs when a specified signal is found

and is controlled by the TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo commands.

PULse specifies that a trigger occurs when the specified signal

meets the pulse width criteria that is controlled by the TRIGger:

MAIn:PULse commands (not available with TDS200 series

oscilloscopes).

TRIGger:MAIn:TYPe?

Might return VIDEO, indicating that the main trigger type is a video

trigger.

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo? (Query Only)

Returns the main video trigger settings.

Trigger

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo?

Might return :TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SOURCE CH1;SYNC FIELD;PO-

Larity NORMAL

Arguments

Examples

Group

Syntax

Examples

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 235

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:LINE

(TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Series

Only)

Sets or queries the line number for the video trigger when

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SYNC is set to LINENUM. This is

equivalent to selecting a line number in the Trigger/Video menu.

Trigger

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:LINE <NR1>

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:LINE?

<NR1> specifies the line number. The minimum is 1. The maximum

is 525 for NTSC, 625 for PAL and SECAM.

The following sequence sets the oscilloscope to trigger on video line

123:

TRIGger:MAIn:TYPe VIDeo

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SYNC LINENum

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:LINE 123

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:POLarity

Sets or queries the video trigger polarity. This is equivalent to

selecting the Polarity option in the Trigger/Video menu.

Trigger

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Group

Command Descriptions

2- 236 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

TDS210 and TDS220 models with firmware below V2.00 and a

TDS2CMA communications module:

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:POLarity { INVERTed | NORMal }

All other oscilloscope, firmware version, and module combinations:

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:POLarity { INVert | NORMal }

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:POLarity?

INVERTed or INVert specifies a positive sync pulse.

NORMal specifies a negative sync pulse.

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:POLarity NORMAL

Selects negative synchronization polarity for the video trigger.

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SOUrce

Sets or queries the source for the video trigger. This is equivalent to

selecting the Source option in the Video trigger menu.

Trigger

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SOUrce { CH<x> | EXT | EXT5 | EXT10 }

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SOUrce?

CH<x> specifies one of the allowable input channels. The value of

<x> can vary from 1 through 4 for 4-channel instruments or 1

through 2 for 2-channel instruments.

EXT specifies the external input (not available with TDS224

oscilloscopes).

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 237

EXT5 specifies the external input, attenuated by a factor of 5 (not

available with TDS224 oscilloscopes).

EXT10 specifies the external input attenuated by a factor of 10

(TPS2000 series only).

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SOUrce CH1

Selects channel 1 as the source for the main video trigger.

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:STANDard

(TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 Series

Only)

Sets or queries the video trigger standard. This is equivalent to

selecting the Standard option in the Trigger/Video menu.

Trigger

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:STANDard { NTSc | PAL }

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:STANdard?

NTSC (default) specifies the NTSC video standard.

PAL specifies the PAL or SECAM video standard.

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:STANdard NTSC

Selects the NTSC standard for the video trigger.

Examples

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Command Descriptions

2- 238 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SYNC

Sets or queries the type for the video trigger sync. This is equivalent

to selecting the Sync option in the Trigger/Video menu.

Trigger

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SYNC { FIELD | LINE | ODD | EVEN |

LINENum }

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SYNC?

FIELD specifies that triggering occur on the vertical sync pulse.

LINE specifies that triggering occur on the horizontal sync pulse.

ODD (TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000

series only) specifies triggering on odd fields.

EVEN (TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000

series only) specifies triggering on even fields.

LINENum (TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and

TPS2000 series only) sets the oscilloscope to trigger on a specific

line number, which is specified through TRIGger:MAIn:VID-

eo:LINE.

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SYNC FIELD

Selects the vertical synchronization pulse for the video trigger sync.

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 239

TRIGger:STATE? (Query Only)

Returns the current state of the triggering system.

NOTE. Accurate real time reporting of the trigger state within any

single waveform acquisition is limited by several factors, including

horizontal sweep speed, and communications and task latencies. To

check for the completion of a single sequence acquisition, use the

*OPC? query.

Trigger

TRIGger:STATE?

ARMED indicates that the oscilloscope is acquiring pretrigger

information. All triggers are ignored when TRIGger:STATE is

ARMed.

READY indicates that all pretrigger information has been acquired and

the oscilloscope is ready to accept a trigger.

TRIGGER indicates that the oscilloscope has seen a trigger and is

acquiring the posttrigger information.

AUTO indicates that the oscilloscope is in auto mode and acquires

data even in the absence of a trigger.

SAVE indicates that acquisition is stopped or that all channels are off.

SCAN indicates that the oscilloscope is in scan mode.

TRIGger:STATE?

Might return READY, indicating that pretrigger data has been acquired

and the oscilloscope is waiting for a trigger.

Group

Syntax

Returns

Examples

Command Descriptions

2- 240 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

*OPC?

*TST? (Query Only)

(Self-Test) Tests the GPIB interface and always returns a 0.

Miscellaneous

*TST?

UNLock (Set Only)

Unlocks the front panel. This command is equivalent to LOCk

NONe.

NOTE. If the oscilloscope is in the Remote With Lockout State

(RWLS), the UNLock command has no effect. For more information

refer to ANSI-IEEE Std. 488.1–1987, Standard Digital Interface for

Programmable Instrumentation, section 2.8.3, on RL State

descriptions.

Miscellaneous

UNLock ALL

ALL specifies all front-panel buttons.

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Returns

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 241

UNLock ALL

Unlocks all front-panel buttons and knobs so they can be used.

LOCk

VERBose

Sets and queries the Verbose state that controls the length of

keywords on query responses. Keywords can be both headers and

arguments. This command does not affect IEEE Std 488.2–1987

Common Commands (those starting with an asterisk).

Miscellaneous

VERBose { OFF | ON | <NR1> }

VERBose?

ON or <NR1> ≠0 sets the Verbose state true, which returns full-length

keywords for applicable setting queries.

OFF or <NR1> = 0 sets the Verbose state false, which returns

minimum-length keywords for applicable setting queries.

VERBose ON

Sets the Verbose state true.

VERBose?

Might return the value 1, showing that the Verbose state is true.

HEADer, *LRN?, SET?

Examples

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Related Commands

Command Descriptions

2- 242 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

*WAI (Set Only)

*WAI (wait) prevents the oscilloscope from executing further

commands or queries until all pending operations finish. This

command lets you synchronize the operation of the oscilloscope with

your application program. Refer to Synchronization Methods on

page 3--10 for more information.

Unlike *OPC?, *WAI returns no value when pending operations

finish. Table 2--30 (*OPC) on page 2--170 lists commands that

generate an operation complete message.

Status and Error

*WAI

BUSY?, *OPC

WAVEFORMANALYSIS:SOUrce

(TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module Only)

Sets or queries the Waveform Analysis source. This command is

equivalent to setting the Sources option in the Waveform Analysis

menu.

Waveform

WAVEFORMANALYSIS:SOUrce { CH1 | CH2 | CH3 | CH4 | MATH }

WAVEFORMANALYSIS:SOUrce?

Group

Syntax

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 243

|CH1 | CH2 | CH3 | CH4 | specifies channel 1 through 4 as the

waveform analysis source.

NOTE. The “CH3 and CH4” options are only valid for instruments

with four channels.

MATH specifies the math waveform as the analysis source.

WAVEFORMANALYSIS:SOUrce CH2

Specifies Channel 2 as the waveform analysis source.

WAVFrm? (Query Only)

Returns WFMPre? and CURVe? data for the waveform specified by

the DATa:SOUrce command. This command is equivalent to sending

WFMPre?; CURVe?. If the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce

command is not displayed, the oscilloscope returns only the

waveform transmission parameters (BYT_Nr, BIT_Nr, ENCdg,

BN_Fmt, BYT_Or).

Waveform

WAVFrm?

See WFMPre? and CURVe? commands.

CURVe?, DATa:SOUrce, WFMPre?

Arguments

Examples

Group

Syntax

Returns

Related Commands

Command Descriptions

2- 244 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

WFMPre? (Query Only)

Returns waveform transmission and formatting settings for the

waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command.

If the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command is not

displayed, the oscilloscope returns only the waveform transmission

parameters (BYT_Nr, BIT_Nr, ENCdg, BN_Fmt, BYT_Or).

Waveform

WFMPre?

The format of the response when the DATa:SOUrce waveform is

activated is:

BYT_NR <NR1>;BIT_NR <NR1>;ENCDG { ASC | BIN };

BN_FMT { RI | RP };BYT_OR { LSB | MSB };NR_PT <NR1>;

WFID <QSTRING>;PT_FMT {ENV | Y};XINCR <NR3>;

PT_OFF <NR1>;XZERO <NR3>;XUNIT<QSTRING>;YMULT <NR3>;

YZERO <NR3>;YOFF <NR3>;YUNIT <QSTRING>

WAVFrm ?

WFMPre:BIT_Nr

Sets or queries the number of bits per waveform point for the

waveform to be transferred. Changing the value of WFMPre:BIT_Nr

also changes the values of WFMPRe:BYT_Nr and DATa:WIDth.

Waveform

WFMPre:BIT_Nr <NR1>

Group

Syntax

Returns

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 245

WFMPre:BIT_Nr?

<NR1> is either 8 or 16, and is equivalent to WFMPre:BYT_Nr * 8

and DATa:WIDth * 8.

WFMPre:BIT_Nr?

Might return 8, indicating that there are 8 bits per waveform point.

DATa:WIDth

WFMPre:BN_Fmt

Sets or queries the format of binary data for the waveform to be

transferred. Changing the value of WFMPre:BN_Fmt also changes

the value of DATa:ENCdg.

Waveform

WFMPre:BN_Fmt { RI | RP }

WFMPre:BN_Fmt?

RI specifies signed integer data-point representation.

RP specifies positive integer data-point representation.

WFMPre:BN_Fmt RP

Specifies that the binary waveform data are positive integer

data-points.

Arguments

Examples

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Command Descriptions

2- 246 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

WFMPre:BN_Fmt?

Returns either RI or RP as the current waveform data format.

DATa:ENCdg

WFMPre:BYT_Nr

Sets or queries the data width for the waveform to be transferred.

This command is equivalent to DATa:WIDth. Changing

WFMPre:BYT_Nr also changes WFMPre:BIT_Nr and DATa:WIDth.

Waveform

WFMPre:BYT_Nr <NR1>

WFMPre:BYT_Nr?

<NR1> is an integer in the range of 1 to 2 that sets the number of

bytes per point.

WFMPre:BYT_Nr 2

Specifies that there are 2 bytes per waveform data point.

DATa:WIDth

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Related Commands

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 247

WFMPre:BYT_Or

Sets or queries which byte of binary waveform data is transmitted

first during a waveform data transfer when DATa:WIDth or

WFMPre:BYT_Nr is set to 2, or WFMPre:BIT_Nr is set to 16.

Changing WFMPre:BYT_Or changes DATa:ENCdg.

Waveform

WFMPre:BYT_Or { LSB | MSB }

WFMPre:BYT_Or?

LSB selects the least significant byte to be transmitted first.

MSB selects the most significant byte to be transmitted first.

WFMPre:BYT_Or MSB

specifies that the most significant byte in the waveform data is

transferred first.

WFMPre:BYT_Or?

Returns either MSB or LSB depending on which data byte is

transferred first.

DATa:ENCdg

WFMPre:ENCdg

Sets or queries the type of encoding for waveform data transferred

with the CURVe command. Changing WFMPre:ENCdg also changes

DATa:ENCdg.

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Related Commands

Command Descriptions

2- 248 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Waveform

WFMPre:ENCdg { ASC | BIN }

WFMPre:ENCdg?

ASC specifies ASCII curve data.

BIN specifies binary curve data.

WFMPre:ENCdg ASC

Specifies that the waveform data is in ASCII format.

WFMPre:ENCdg?

Might return BIN, indicating that the waveform data is in binary

format.

DATa:ENCdg

WFMPre:NR_Pt? (Query Only)

Returns the number of points that are in the transmitted waveform

record, as specified by DATa:SOUrce. The number of points depends

on DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP, and whether DATa:SOUrce is YT or

FFT. NR_Pt is at most 2500 for YT and 1024 for FFT. NR_Pt is

always at least one.

When the DATa:SOUrce is not displayed, the TDS210 and TDS220

(firmware below V 2.00) with a TDS2CMA communications module

will return a value. All other oscilloscope, firmware version, and

module combinations will generate an error and will return event

code 2244.

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Related Commands

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 249

Waveform

WFMPre:NR_Pt?

Returns <NR1>, which is the number of data points. If DATa:WIDth is

2, then there are <NR1>*2 bytes in the curve.

DATa:ENCdg, DATa:SOUrce, DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP

WFMPre:PT_Fmt

The set form of this command sets the format (Y or ENV) of the

reference waveform specified by the DATa:DESTination command.

The query form returns the format of the waveform specified by the

DATa:SOUrce command, if that waveform is on or displayed. If the

waveform is not displayed, the query form of this command

generates an error and returns event code 2244.

Waveform

WFMPre:PT_Fmt { ENV|Y}

WFMPre:PT_Fmt?

Yspecifies a normal waveform where one ASCII or binary data point

is transmitted for each point in the waveform record.

For Yformat, the time (absolute coordinate) of a point, relative to the

trigger, can be calculated using the following formula. N ranges from

0 to 2499.

Group

Syntax

Examples

Related Commands

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Command Descriptions

2- 250 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Xn=XZEro+XINcr(n--PT_OFf)

For Yformat, the magnitude (usually voltage, relative to ground)

(absolute coordinate) of a point can be calculated:

Yn= YZEro + YMUIty (yn-- Y O F f )

ENV specifies that the oscilloscope transmit the waveform as

minimum and maximum point pairs. Peak detect waveforms use

ENV format. Peak Detect mode specifies a maximum of 1250

(minimum, maximum) pairs, with the time between pairs being

2*XINcr.

The magnitudes and times of ENV format waveform points can be

calculated using the same formulas used for Y format, as long as you

recognize that the points consist of (minimum, maximum) pairs,

where each pair was collected over a time period of 2*XINcr.

Thus, the samples for n=0 (a minimum) and n=1 (a maximum), the

first (minimum, maximum) pair, were collected over a time interval

of width 2*XINcr, that began at the time found by setting n to zero

in the formula. The next pair were collected over the interval that

began at the time found by setting n to 2 in the formula, and so on.

WFMPre:PT_Fmt Y

Sets the waveform data point format to Y.

WFMPre:PT_Fmt?

Returns either Yor ENV

CURVe, ACQuire:MODe

Examples

Related Commands

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 251

WFMPre:PT_Off

The set form this command is ignored.

The query form always returns a 0, unless the DATA:SOUrce

waveform is not displayed, in which case the query generates an

error and returns event code 2244.

This command is included for compatibility with other Tektronix

oscilloscopes.

NOTE. Use the WFMPre:XINcr, WFMPre:XUNit, and

WFMPre:XZEro queries to determine the trigger position.

Waveform

WFMPre:PT_Off?

Arguments are ignored.

WFMPre:WFId? (Query Only)

Returns a descriptive string from the waveform specified in the

DATa:SOUrce command, if that waveform is active or displayed. If

that waveform is not active or displayed, the query fails and the

oscilloscope generates an execution error with event code 2244

(waveform requested is not active).

Waveform

WFMPre:WFId?

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Group

Syntax

Command Descriptions

2- 252 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

WFMPre:WFId?

For a YT waveform, this might return:

:WFMPRE:WFID “Ch1, DC coupling, 1.0E0 V/div, 5.0E-4

s/div, 2500 points, Sample mode”

For a Math waveform, this might return:

:WFMPRE:WFID “Math, DC coupling, 1.0E0 V/div, 5.0E-4

s/div, 2500 points, Sample mode”

For an FFT spectrum (TDS200 series with a TDS2MM measurement

module, TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and

TDS2000 series only) this might return:

:WFMPRE:WFID “Math, DC coupling, 1.0E1 dB/div,

2.52525253E4 Hz/div, 1024 points, Sample mode”

WFMPre:XINcr

The set form of this command specifies the interval (seconds per

point for non-FFT, Hertz per point for FFT) between samples of the

reference waveform specified by the DATa:DESTination command.

The oscilloscope uses this value to calculate the seconds/division or

Hertz/division units shown in the status bar and cursor readouts when

displaying a reference waveform.

The query form returns the interval between samples of the

waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command, if that

waveform is active or displayed. If that waveform is inactive or not

displayed, the query fails and the oscilloscope generates an

execution error with event code 2244 (waveform requested is not

active).

NOTE. For waveform records acquired in Peak Detect mode, even

though there is a pair of samples for each conceptual time period,

the XINcr is such that (XINcr * recl) = the total time over which the

data was collected.

Examples

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 253

Waveform

WFMPre:XINcr <NR3>

WFMPre:XINcr?

<NR3> is the interval between points in the waveform record, in the

units specified by WFMPre:XUNit. Note that at some fast sweeps,

some points in the waveform record are produced by interpolation.

DATa:SOUrce CH1 WFMPre:XINcr

Might return :WFMPRE:XINCR 2.0E-6

WFMPre:XUNit

For all model and firmware combinations except the TDS200 series

with a TDS2CMA communications module, the set form of this

command specifies the horizontal units (”s” for seconds and “Hz”

for Hertz) for the reference waveform specified by the DATa:DES-

Tination command. Setting a reference waveform to Hz causes the

oscilloscope to display the waveform as an FFT waveform.

NOTE. For TDS200 oscilloscopes used with a TDS2CMA commu-

nications module, the set form is ignored.

The query form returns the horizontal units for the waveform

specified by DATa:SOURce. If the waveform specified by

DATa:SOURce is not displayed, the query generates event message

2244.

Waveform

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Examples

Group

Command Descriptions

2- 254 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

WFMPre:XUNit <qstring>

WFMPre:XUNit?

<qstring> is “s” or “Hz”

WFMPre:XZEro

The set form of this command specifies the position, in XUNits, of

the first sample of the reference waveform specified by the

DATa:DESTination command, relative to the trigger.

The query form returns the position of the first sample of the

waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command, if that

waveform is active or displayed.

If that waveform is not active or displayed, the query fails and the

oscilloscope generates an execution error with event code 2244

(waveform requested is not active).

The oscilloscope sets WFMPre:XZEro to zero when:

HThe display mode is set to XY.

HThe DATa:SOUrce is set to MATH FFT when the waveform is

acquired.

NOTE. The oscilloscope uses XZEro when calculating cursor

readouts.

Waveform

WFMPre:XZEro <NR3>

WFMPre:XZEro?

Syntax

Arguments

Group

Syntax

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 255

<NR3> is the position, in XUNits, of the first waveform sample.

WFMPre:YMUlt

YMUlt is a value, expressed in YUNits per digitizer level, used to

convert waveform record values to YUNit values using the following

formula (where dl is digitizer levels):

value_in_YUNits = ((curve_in_dl – YOFF_in_dl) * YMUlt) +

YZERO_in_YUNits

The set form of this command sets the vertical scale factor of the

reference waveform specified by the DATa:DESTination command,

expressed in YUNits per digitizing level.

The query form returns a value for the waveform specified by the

DATa:SOUrce command, if that waveform is active or displayed. If

that waveform is not active or displayed, the query fails and the

oscilloscope generates an execution error with event code 2244

(waveform requested is not active).

Waveform

WFMPre:YMUlt <NR3>

WFMPre:YMUlt?

<NR3> is the vertical scale factor, in YUNits (usually volts) per

sample value.

A query result of zero has special meaning. A zero indicates the

waveform has unknown vertical scaling. (TDS200, TDS1000,

TDS2000, TDS1000B, or TDS2000B series; TPS2000 series will

never return zero.)

Arguments

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Returns

Command Descriptions

2- 256 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

An example of unknown vertical scaling is a math waveform of

CH1+CH2 where CH1 vertical scaling is different from CH2 vertical

scaling. In this case, WFMPre:YUNit? returns U. (Does not apply to

the TPS2000 series.)

WFMPre:YOFf

YOFf is a value, expressed in digitizer levels, used to convert

waveform record values to YUNit values using the following

formula (where dl is digitizer levels):

value_in_YUNits =

((curve_in_dl – YOFF_in_dl) * YMUlt) + YZERO_in_YUNits

The set form of this command stores a value for the reference

waveform specified by the DATa:DESTination command. This value

does not affect how the oscilloscope displays the waveform, but does

affect the cursor readouts.

The query form returns a value for the waveform specified by the

DATa:SOUrce command, in digitizer levels, if that waveform is

active or displayed. If that waveform is not active or displayed, the

query fails and the oscilloscope generates an execution error with

event code 2244 (waveform requested is not active).

Waveform

WFMPre:YOFf <NR3>

WFMPre:YOFf?

<NR3> is a value expressed in digitizing levels.

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 257

WFMPre:YUNit

For all model and firmware combinations except the TDS200 series

with a TDS2CMA communications module or a TDS2MM

measurement module, the set form of this command sets the vertical

units for the reference waveform specified by DATa:DESTination.

NOTE. It is possible to set a combination of WFMPre:XUNit and

WFMPre:YUNit for a reference waveform that is inconsistent (for

example, seconds with dB or Hertz with volts). The oscilloscope will

not warn you of this condition. The oscilloscope uses WFMPre:XU-

Nit to determine whether the waveform is a YT or an FFT.

For TDS200 oscilloscopes used with a TDS2CMA communications

or a TDS2MM measurement module, the set form is ignored. Refer to

the WFMPre:YMUlt command for equivalent functionality.

The query form returns the vertical units of the waveform specified

by the DATa:SOUrce command, if that waveform is active or

displayed. If that waveform is not active or displayed, the query fails

and the oscilloscope generates an execution error with event code

2244 (waveform requested is not active).

Waveform

WFMPre:YUNit <qstring>

WFMPre:YUNit?

<qstring> is “Volts”,“U”,or“dB”.

The TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 series have the following

additional arguments:

Afor amps

VA for volt-amps

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Command Descriptions

2- 258 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

AA for amps*amps

VV for volts*volts

<QString> returns the following:

Volts for volts

Ufor unknown units (divisions)

dB for decibels

? for unknown mask waveforms units

For the TDS1000B, TDS2000B, and TPS2000 series, <QString> can

return the following:

Afor amps

VA for volts*amps

AA for amps*amps

VV for volts*volts

WFMPre:YZEro

For all model and firmware combinations except the TDS210 or

TDS220 oscilloscope (firmware below V 2.00) with a TDS2CMA

communications module, YZEro is a value, expressed in YUNits,

used to convert waveform record values to YUNit values using the

following formula (where dl is digitizer levels):

value_in_YUNits =

((curve_in_dl – YOFF_in_dl) * YMUlt) + YZERO_in_YUNits

YZEro is used when calculating cursor readouts.

The set form of this command affects the reference waveform

specified by DATA:DESTination.

The query form of this command returns a value for the waveform

specified by DATA:SOUrce. If that waveform is not active or

displayed, the query fails and the oscilloscope generates an

ReturnsReturns

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 259

execution error with event code 2244 (waveform requested is not

active).

NOTE. For the TDS210 or TDS220 oscilloscope (firmware below

V 2.00) with a TDS2CMA communications module, the set form is

ignored. The query always returns zero.

Waveform

WFMPre:YZEro <NR3>

WFMPre:YZEro?

<NR3> is a value, expressed in YUNits.

WFMPre, Additional Commands for Compatibility

The set form of these additional commands is ignored. The query

form generates event messages 100 (Command Error) and 420

(Query Unterminated). These commands are included for compati-

bility purposes only.

Table 2--31 lists additional WFMPre commands.

Table 2- 31: Additional WFMPre commands

Command Argument Description

WFMPre:XMUlt <NR3> Horizontal (X-axis) scale factor

WFMPre:XOFf <NR3> Horizontal (X-axis) offset

WFMPre:ZMUlt <NR3> Z-axis scale factor

WFMPre:ZOFf <NR3> Z-axis offset

Group

Syntax

Arguments

Command Descriptions

2- 260 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Table 2- 31: Additional WFMPre commands (Cont.)

Command DescriptionArgument

WFMPre:ZUNit <QString> Z-axis units

WFMPre:ZZEro <NR3> Z-axis origin offset

WFMPre:<wfm>? (Query Only)

Returns the waveform formatting data for the waveform specified by

<wfm>, if that waveform is active or displayed. If that waveform is

not active or displayed, the query fails and the oscilloscope generates

event message 420 (Query unterminated) and 2244 (waveform

requested is not active).

Waveform

WFMPre:<wfm>? (Refer to Waveform Mnemonics on page 2-10

for more information.)

Returns the response in the following format:

:WFMPre:<wfm>:WFID <Qstring>;PT_FMT { ENV|Y};

XINcr <NR3>;PT_Off <NR1>;XZEro <NR3>;XUNit <QString>;

YMUlt <NR3>;YZEro <NR3>;YOFF <NR3>;YUNit <QString>;

NR_Pt <NR1>

WFMPre:<wfm>:NR_Pt? (Query Only)

NOTE. This query is not available when using a TDS210 or TDS220

oscilloscope (firmware below V 2.00) with a TDS2CMA communica-

tions module.

Group

Syntax

Returns

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 261

Returns the number of points that are in the transmitted waveform

record. The number of points depends on DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP,

and whether DATa:SOUrce is YT or FFT. NR_Pt is at most 2500 for

YT and 1024 for FFT. NR_Pt is always at least one.

When the DATa:SOUrce is not displayed, the oscilloscope will

generate an error and return event code 2244.

Waveform

WFMPre:<wfm>:NR_Pt?

WFMPre:CH1:NR_Pt?

Returns <NR1>, which is the number of data points. If DATa:WIDth is

2, then there are <NR1>*2 bytes in the curve.

DATa:SOUrce, DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP

WFMPre:<wfm>:PT_Fmt

Same as WFMPre:PT_Fmt, except that <wfm> specifies the

source/destination waveform instead of DATa:SOUrce and

DATa:DESTINATION. For set commands, if <wfm> is not a

reference waveform, the oscilloscope generates error 2241.

WFMPre:<wfm>:PT_Off

Same as WFMPre:PT_Off, except that <wfm> specifies the

source/destination waveform instead of DATa:SOUrce and

DATa:DESTINATION.

For set commands, if <wfm> is not a reference waveform, the

oscilloscope generates error 2241.

Group

Syntax

Examples

Related Commands

Command Descriptions

2- 262 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Otherwise, the set form of this command is ignored.

WFMPre:<wfm>:WFId? (Query Only)

Same as WFMPre:WFId?, except that <wfm> specifies the source

waveform instead of DATa:SOUrce.

WFMPre:<wfm>:XINcr

Same as WFMPre:XINcr, except that <wfm> specifies the

source/destination waveform instead of DATa:SOUrce and

DATa:DESTINATION.

For set commands, if <wfm> is not a reference waveform, the

oscilloscope generates error 2241.

WFMPre:<wfm>:XUNit

Same as WFMPre:XUNit, except that <wfm> specifies the

source/destination waveform instead of DATa:SOUrce and

DATa:DESTINATION.

WFMPre:<wfm>:XZEro

Same as WFMPre:XZEro, except that <wfm> specifies the

source/destination waveform instead of DATa:SOUrce and

DATa:DESTINATION.

For set commands, if <wfm> is not a reference waveform, the

oscilloscope generates error 2241.

WFMPre:<wfm>:YMUlt

Same as WFMPre:YMUlt, except that <wfm> specifies the

source/destination waveform instead of DATa:SOUrce and

DATa:DESTINATION.

Command Descriptions

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 2- 263

For set commands, if <wfm> is not a reference waveform, the

oscilloscope generates error 2241.

WFMPre:<wfm>:YOFf

Same as WFMPre:YOFf, except that <wfm> specifies the source/

destination waveform instead of DATa:SOUrce and DATa:DES-

TINATION.

For set commands, if <wfm> is not a reference waveform, the

oscilloscope generates error 2241.

WFMPre:<wfm>:YUNit

Same as WFMPre:YUNit, except that <wfm> specifies the

source/destination waveform instead of DATa:SOUrce and

DATa:DESTINATION.

For set commands, if <wfm> is not a reference waveform, the

oscilloscope generates error 2241.

WFMPre:<wfm>:YZEro

Same as WFMPre:YZEro, except that <wfm> specifies the

source/destination waveform instead of DATa:SOUrce and

DATa:DESTINATION.

For set commands, if <wfm> is not a reference waveform, the

oscilloscope generates error 2241.

Command Descriptions

2- 264 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Status and Events

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 3-1

Status and Events

The oscilloscope provides a status and event reporting system for the

GPIB, RS-232, and USB interfaces. This system informs you of

certain significant events that occur within the oscilloscope.

The oscilloscope status reporting system consists of five 8-bit

registers and two queues. This section describes these registers and

components, and explains how the event handling system operates.

Registers

The registers in the event reporting system fall into two functional

groups:

HThe Standard Event Status Register (SESR) and the Status Byte

oscilloscope. These registers are the Status Registers.

HThe Device Event Status Enable Register (DESER), the Event

Status Enable Register (ESER), and the Service Request Enable

reported to the Status Registers and the Event Queue. These three

registers are the Enable Registers.

Status Registers

The Standard Event Status Register (SESR) and the Status Byte

the oscilloscope is in use. IEEE Std 488.2–1987 defines these

registers.

Each bit in a Status Register records a particular type of event, such

as an execution error or service request. When an event of a given

type occurs, the oscilloscope sets the bit that represents that type of

event to a value of one. (You can disable bits so that they ignore

events and remain at zero. For more information, refer to the Enable

Registers section on page 3--4.) Reading the status registers tells

you what types of events have occurred.

Status and Events

3-2 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

The Standard Event Status Register (SESR). The SESR, shown in

Figure 3--1, records eight types of events that can occur within the

oscilloscope. Use *ESR? to read the SESR register. Reading the

accumulate information about new events. Figure 3--1 shows SESR

bit functions.

PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC

76543210

Figure 3- 1: The Standard Event Status Register (SESR)

Table 3--1 lists and describes SESR bit functions.

Table 3- 1: SESR bit functions

Bit Function

7 (MSB) PON (Power On). Shows that the oscilloscope was powered on.

6URQ (User Request). Not used.

5CME (Command Error). Shows that an error occurred while the

oscilloscope was parsing a command or query. Command error

messages are listed in Table 3--4 on page 3--18.

4EXE (Execution Error). Shows that an error occurred while the

oscilloscope was executing a command or query. Execution error

messages are listed in Table 3--5 on page 3--18.

3DDE (Device Error). Shows that a device error occurred. Device

error messages are listed in Table 3--6 on page 3--22.

2QYE (Query Error). Shows that either an attempt was made to

read the Output Queue when no data was present or pending, or

that data in the Output Queue was lost.

Status and Events

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 3-3

Table 3- 1: SESR bit functions (Cont.)

Bit Function

1RQC (Request Control). Not used.

0 (LSB) OPC (Operation Complete). Shows that the operation is

complete. This bit is set when all pending operations complete

following a *OPC command. See Table 2--30 on page 2--170 for a

list of commands that generate an Operation Complete message.

The Status Byte Register (SBR). The SBR, shown in Figure 3--2, records

whether output is available in the Output Queue, whether the

oscilloscope requests service, and whether the SESR has recorded

any events.

Use a Serial Poll (GPIB and USB only) or *STB? to read the

contents of the SBR. The bits in the SBR are set and cleared

depending on the contents of the SESR, the Event Status Enable

to obtain the SBR, bit 6 is the RQS bit. When you use the *STB?

query to obtain the SBR, bit 6 is the MSS bit. Reading the SBR does

not clear the bits.

Figure 3--2 shows the SBR bit functions.

—

RQS

ESBMAV————

MSS

543210

Figure 3- 2: The Status Byte Register (SBR)

Table 3--2 lists and describes SBR bit functions.

Status and Events

3-4 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Table 3- 2: SBR bit functions

Bit Function

7 (MSB) Not used.

6RQS (Request Service), obtained from a serial poll. Shows that

the oscilloscope requests service from the GPIB controller or USB

host.

6MSS (Master Status Summary), obtained from *STB?.

Summarizes the ESB and MAV bits in the SBR.

5ESB (Event Status Bit). Shows that status is enabled and present

in the SESR.

4MAV (Message Available). Shows that output is available in the

Output Queue.

3--0 Not used.

Enable Registers

The DESER, ESER, and SRER allow you to select which events are

reported to the Status Registers and the Event Queue. Each Enable

a filter to the Event Queue) and can prevent information from being

recorded in the register or queue.

Each bit in an Enable Register corresponds to a bit in the Status

the Status Register, the corresponding bit in the Enable Register

must be set to one. If the bit in the Enable Register is set to zero, the

event is not recorded.

The bits in the Enable Registers are set using various commands.

The Enable Registers and the commands used to set them are

described below.

The Device Event Status Enable Register (DESER). The DESER, shown

in Figure 3--3, controls which types of events are reported to the

SESR and the Event Queue. The bits in the DESER correspond to

those in the SESR, as described earlier.

Status and Events

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 3-5

Use the DESE command to enable and disable the bits in the

DESER. Use the DESE? query to read the DESER. Figure 3--3

shows the DESER bit functions.

PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC

76543210

Figure 3- 3: The Device Event Status Enable Register (DESER)

The Event Status Enable Register (ESER). The ESER controls which

type of events are summarized by the Event Status Bit (ESB) in the

SBR.

Use the *ESE command to set the bits in the ESER, and use the

*ESE? query to read it. Figure 3--4 shows the ESER bit functions.

PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC

76543210

Figure 3- 4: The Event Status Enable Register (ESER)

The Service Request Enable Register (SRER). The SRER controls which

bits in the SBR generate a Service Request (GPIB and USB only)

and are summarized by the Master Status Summary (MSS) bit.

Use the *SRE command to set the SRER. Use the *SRE? query to

read it. The RQS bit remains set to one until either the Status Byte

bit changes back to a zero. Figure 3--5 shows the SRER bit functions.

——ESBMAV————

76543210

Figure 3- 5: The Service Request Enable Register (SRER)

Status and Events

3-6 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

The Enable Registers and the *PSC Command

The *PSC command controls the contents of the Enable Registers at

power on. Sending *PSC 1 sets the Enable Registers at power on as

follows:

HDESER 255 (equivalent to a DESe 255 command)

HESER 0 (equivalent to an *ESE 0 command)

HSRER 0 (equivalent to an *SRE 0 command)

Sending *PSC 0 lets the Enable Registers maintain their values in

nonvolatile memory through a power cycle.

NOTE. To enable the PON (Power On) event to generate a Service

Request (GPIB and USB only), send *PSC 0, use the DESe and

*ESE commands to enable PON in the DESER and ESER, and use

the *SRE command to enable bit 5 in the SRER. Subsequent

power-on cycles will generate a Service Request (GPIB and USB

only).

Queues

The oscilloscope status and event reporting system contains two

queues: the Output Queue and the Event Queue.

The Output Queue

The Output Queue stores query responses waiting to be output. The

oscilloscope empties the Output Queue each time it receives a new

command or query message. This means you must read any query

response before you send the next command or query, or you will

lose responses to earlier queries. Also, an error may result.

Status and Events

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 3-7

NOTE. When a controller sends a query, an <EOM>, and a second

query, the digitizing oscilloscope normally clears the first response

and outputs the second while reporting a Query Error (QYE bit in the

ESER) to indicate the lost response. A fast controller, however, may

receive a part or all of the first response as well. To avoid this

situation, the controller should always read the response immediately

after sending any terminated query message or send a DCL (Device

Clear) before sending the second query.

The Event Queue

TheEventQueuestoresdetailedinformationonupto20events.If

more than 20 events stack up in the Event Queue, the 20th event is

replaced by event code 350, “Too many events.”

Read the Event Queue with EVENT? (which returns only the event

number), with EVMsg? (which returns the event number and a text

description of the event), or with ALLEV? (which returns all the

event numbers along with a description of the event). Reading an

event removes it from the queue.

Before reading an event from the Event Queue, you must use *ESR?

to read the summary of the event from the SESR. This makes the

events summarized by *ESR? available to EVENT? and EVMSG?,

and empties the SESR.

Reading the SESR erases any events that were summarized by

previous *ESR? reads but not read from the Event Queue. Events

that follow an *ESR? read are put in the Event Queue, but are not

available until *ESR? is used again.

Status and Events

3-8 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Event Handling Sequence

In this description, the numbers in parentheses map to the corre-

sponding numbers in Figure 3--6.

When an event occurs, a signal is sent to the DESER (1). If that type

of event is enabled in the DESER (that is, if the bit for that event

type is set to 1), the appropriate bit in the SESR is set to one and the

event is recorded in the Event Queue (2). If the corresponding bit in

the ESER is also enabled (3), then the ESB bit in the SBR is set to

one (4).

When output is sent to the Output Queue, the MAV bit in the SBR is

set to one (5).

When a bit in the SBR is set to one and the corresponding bit in the

SRER is enabled (6), the MSS bit in the SBR is set to one and a

service request (GPIB and USB only) is generated (7).

Figure 3--6 shows how to use the status and event handling system.

Status and Events

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 3-9

Device Event Status Enable Register

(DESER)

Standard Event Status Register

(SESR)

Event Status Enable Register

(ESER)

Status Byte Register

(SBR)

Service Request Enable Register

(SRER)

Event

Queue

Output

Queue

Event

Byte

PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC

76543210

PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC

76543210

PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC

76543210

—

RQS

ESBMAV————

MSS

543210

——ESBMAV————

76543210

Read using DESE?

Write using DESE

Read using *ESR?

Cannot be written

Read using *ESE?

Write using *ESE

Read using *STB?

Cannot be written

Read using *SRE?

Write using *SRE

Figure 3- 6: Status and event handling process

Status and Events

3-10 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Synchronization Methods

Although most commands are completed almost immediately after

being received by the oscilloscope, some commands start a process

that requires more time. For example, once a HARDCOPY START

command is executed, it may be a few seconds before the hardcopy

operation is complete. Rather than remain idle while the operation is

in process, the oscilloscope continues processing other commands.

This means that some operations are not completed in the order that

they were sent.

There may be times when the result of an operation is dependent on

the result of an earlier one, and you must be assured that the first

operation has completed before processing the next one. The status

and event reporting system provides ways to do this.

For example, a typical application would be to acquire a single-se-

quence waveform, and then take a measurement on the acquired

waveform. You could use the following command sequence:

/** Set up single-sequence acquisition **/

SELECT:CH1 ON

ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE

ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE

/** Acquire waveform data **/

ACQUIRE:STATE ON

/** Set up the measurement 2

MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE PK2PK

MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1

/** Take peak-to-peak measurement on acquired data **/

MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?

The acquisition of the waveform requires extended processing time

and may not complete before the amplitude measurement is taken.

(See Figure 3--7.) This will result in an incorrect peak-to-peak value.

Status and Events

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 3-11

MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?

Processing Time

Acquiring Waveform Data

ACQUIRE:STATE ON

Figure 3- 7: Command processing without using synchronization

The acquisition of the waveform must be completed before the

measurement can be taken on the acquired data. This is achieved by

synchronizing the program so that the measurement command is not

processed by the oscilloscope until the acquisition is complete.

Figure 3--8 shows the desired processing sequence.

MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?

Processing Time

Acquiring Waveform Data

ACQUIRE:STATE ON

Figure 3- 8: Processing sequence with synchronization

Four commands can be used to synchronize the operation of the

oscilloscope with your application program: *WAI, BUSY?, *OPC,

and *OPC?. The *OPC? query is the most simple.

Using the *WAI Command

You can force commands to execute sequentially by using the *WAI

command. This command forces completion of the previous

commands before processing new ones.

Status and Events

3-12 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

The same command sequence using the *WAI command for

synchronization follows:

/* Set up single-sequence acquisition */

SELECT:CH1 ON

ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE

ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE

/* Acquire waveform data */

ACQUIRE:STATE ON

/* Set up the measurement parameters */

MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE PK2PK

MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1

/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the

measurement */

*WAI

/* Take peak-to-peak measurement on acquired data */

MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?

Though *WAI is one of the easiest ways to achieve synchronization,

it is also the most costly. The processing time of the oscilloscope is

slowed, since it is processing a single command at a time. This time

could be spent doing other tasks.

The controller can continue to write commands to the input buffer,

but the commands are not processed by the oscilloscope until all

operations in process are complete. If the input buffer becomes full,

the controller will be unable to write any more commands to the

buffer and will result in a time out.

Status and Events

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 3-13

Using the BUSY Query

BUSY? allows you to find out whether the oscilloscope is busy

processing a command that has an extended processing time, such as

single-sequence acquisition.

The same command sequence using BUSY? for synchronization

follows:

/* Set up single-sequence acquisition */

SELECT:CH1 ON

ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE

ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE

/* Acquire waveform data */

ACQUIRE:STATE ON

/* Set up the measurement parameters */

MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE PK2PK

MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1

/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the

measurement */

While BUSY? keep looping

/* Take peak-to-peak measurement on acquired data */

MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?

This sequence lets you create your own wait loop rather than using

the *WAI command. An advantage to using BUSY? is that you

eliminate the possibility of a time out caused by writing too many

commands to the input buffer. The controller is still tied up, though,

and the repeated BUSY? results in more bus traffic.

Status and Events

3-14 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Using the *OPC Set Command

If the corresponding status registers are enabled, the *OPC command

sets the OPC bit in the Standard Event Status Register (SESR) when

an operation is complete. You can use this command in conjunction

with either a serial poll or service request handler to achieve

synchronization.

Serial Poll Method (GPIB and USB Only). Enable the OPC bit in the

Device Event Status Enable Register (DESER) and the Event Status

Enable Register (ESER) using the DESE and *ESE commands.

When the operation is complete, the OPC bit in the Standard Event

Status Register (SESR) is enabled, and the Event Status Bit (ESB) in

the Status Byte Register is enabled.

The same command sequence using the *OPC command for

synchronization with serial polling looks like this:

/* Set up single-sequence acquisition */

SELECT:CH1 ON

ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE

ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE

/* Enable the status registers */

DESE 1

*ESE 1

*SRE 0

/* Acquire waveform data */

ACQUIRE:STATE ON

/* Set up the measurement parameters */

MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE PK2PK

MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1

/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before

taking the measurement */

*OPC

While serial poll = 0, keep looping

/* Take peak-to-peak measurement on acquired data */

Status and Events

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 3-15

MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?

This technique requires less bus traffic than did looping on BUSY?.

Service Request Method (GPIB and USB Only). Enable the OPC bit in the

Device Event Status Enable Register (DESER) and the Event Status

Enable Register (ESER) using the DESE and *ESE commands. Also,

enable service requests by setting the ESB bit in the Service Request

Enable Register (SRER) using the *SRE command. When the

operation is complete, a Service Request is generated.

The same command sequence using the *OPC command for

synchronization looks like this:

/* Set up single-sequence acquisition */

SELECT:CH1 ON

ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE

ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE

/* Enable the status registers */

DESE 1

*ESE 1

*SRE 32

/* Acquire waveform data */

ACQUIRE:STATE ON

/* Set up the measurement parameters */

MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE PK2PK

MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1

/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the

measurement */

*OPC

The program can now do different tasks such as talk

to other devices. The SRQ, when it comes, interrupts

those tasks and returns control to this task

/* Take peak-to-peak measurement on acquired data */

MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?

Status and Events

3-16 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

This technique requires less bus traffic than did looping on BUSY?.

The program can now do different tasks such as talk to other

devices. The SRQ, when it comes, interrupts those tasks and

returns control to this task.

/* Take peak-to-peak measurement on acquired data */

MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?

This technique is more efficient but requires more sophisticated

programming.

Using the *OPC? Query (the Most Simple Approach)

*OPC? places a 1 in the Output Queue once an operation is

complete. A timeout could occur if you try to read the output queue

before there is any data in it.

The same command sequence using *OPC? for synchronization

follows:

/* Set up single-sequence acquisition */

SELECT:CH1 ON

ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE

ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE

/* Acquire waveform data */

ACQUIRE:STATE ON

/* Set up the measurement parameters */

MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE PK2PK

MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1

/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before

taking the measurement */

*OPC?

Status and Events

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 3-17

Wait for read from Output Queue.

/* Take peak-to-peak measurement on acquired data */

MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?

Using *OPC? synchronization is the simplest approach. It requires

no status handling or loops. However, you must set the controller

time out for longer than the acquisition operation.

Messages

Tables 3--3 through 3--9 list all the programming interface messages

the oscilloscope generates in response to commands and queries.

Each message is the result of an event. Each type of event sets a

specific bit in the SESR and is controlled by the equivalent bit in

the DESER. Thus, each message is associated with a specific SESR

bit. In the message tables that follow, the associated SESR bit is

specified in the table title, with exceptions noted with the error

message text.

Table 3--3 shows the messages when the system has no events or

status to report. These have no associated SESR bit.

Table 3- 3: No event messages

Code Message

0No events to report : queue empty

1No events to report : new events pending *ESR?

Status and Events

3-18 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Table 3--4 shows the error messages generated by improper

command syntax. Check that the command is properly formed and

that it follows the rules in the Command Syntax section starting on

page 2--1.

Table 3- 4: Command error messages – CME bit 5

Code Message

100 Command error

102 Syntax error

103 Invalid separator

104 Data type error

105 GET not allowed

108 Parameter not allowed

110 Command header error

111 Header separator error

112 Program mnemonic too long

113 Undefined header

161 Invalid block data (indefinite length blocks are not allowed over

the RS-232)

Table 3--5 lists the errors that are detected during execution of a

command. In these error messages, you should read “macro” as

“alias.”

Table 3- 5: Execution error messages – EXE bit 4

Code Message

200 Execution error

201 Invalid while in local

210 Trigger error

Status and Events

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 3-19

Table 3- 5: Execution error messages – EXE bit 4 (Cont.)

Code Message

211 Trigger ignored

212 Arm ignored

220 Parameter error

221 Settings conflict

222 Data out of range

223 Too much data

224 Illegal parameter value

230 Data corrupt or stale

240 Hardware error

241 Hardware missing

242 Hardware configuration error

243 Hardware I/O device error

250 Mass storage error

251 Missing mass storage

252 Missing media

253 Corrupt media

254 Media full

255 Directory full

256 File name not found

257 File name error

258 Media protected

260 Expression error

261 Math error in expression

2200 Measurement error, Measurement system error

Status and Events

3-20 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Table 3- 5: Execution error messages – EXE bit 4 (Cont.)

Code Message

2201 Measurement error, Zero period

2202 Measurement error, No period found

2203 Measurement error, No period, second waveform

2204 Measurement error, Low signal amplitude

2205 Measurement error, Low amplitude, second waveform

2206 Measurement error, Invalid gate

2207 Measurement error, Measurement overflow

2208 Measurement error, Waveform does not cross Mid Ref

2209 Measurement error, No second Mid Ref crossing

2210 Measurement error, No Mid Ref crossing, second waveform

2211 Measurement error, No backwards Mid Ref crossing

2212 Measurement error, No negative crossing

2213 Measurement error, No positive crossing

2214 Measurement error, No crossing

2215 Measurement error, No crossing, second waveform

2216 Measurement error, No crossing, target waveform

2217 Measurement error, Constant waveform

2218 Measurement error, Unused

2219 Measurement error, No valid edge: No arm sample

2220 Measurement error, No valid edge: No arm cross

2221 Measurement error, No valid edge: No trigger cross

2222 Measurement error, No valid edge: No second cross

2223 Measurement error, waveform mismatch

2224 Measurement error, WAIT calculating

Status and Events

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 3-21

Table 3- 5: Execution error messages – EXE bit 4 (Cont.)

Code Message

2225 Measurement error, No waveform to measure

2226 Null Waveform

2227 Positive and Negative Clipping

2228 Measurement error, Positive Clipping

2229 Measurement error, Negative Clipping

2230 Measurement error, High Ref < Low Ref

2235 Math error, Invalid math description

2241 Waveform request is invalid

2242 Data start > record length

2243 Waveform requested is not a data source

2244 Waveform requested is not turned on

2245 Saveref error, Selected channel is turned off

2246 Saveref error, Selected channel data invalid

2248 Saveref error, Source reference data invalid

2260 Calibration error

2301 Cursor error, Off screen

2302 Cursor error, Cursors are off

2303 Cursor error, Cursor source waveform is off

Status and Events

3-22 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Table 3--6 lists the device errors that can occur during oscilloscope

operation. These errors may indicate that the oscilloscope needs

repair.

Table 3- 6: Device error messages – DDE bit 3

Code Message

300 Device-specific error

310 System error

311 Memory error

313 Calibration memory lost

314 Save/recall memory lost

315 Configuration memory lost

350 Queue overflow (does not set DDE bit)

361 Parity error in program message (check parity)

362 Framing error in program message (check baud rate)

363 Input buffer overrun (check flagging)

Table 3--7 lists the system event messages. These messages are

generated whenever certain system conditions occur.

Table 3- 7: System event messages

Code Message

400 Query event

401 Power on (PON bit 7 set)

402 Operation complete (OPC bit 0 set)

403 User request (URQ bit 6 set)

404 Power fail (DDE bit 3 set)

405 Request control

Status and Events

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 3-23

Table 3- 7: System event messages (Cont.)

Code Message

410 Query INTERRUPTED (QYE bit 2 set)

420 Query UNTERMINATED (QYE bit 2 set)

430 Query DEADLOCKED (QYE bit 2 set)

440 Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response (QYE bit 2 set),

normally caused by using a query that returns arbitrary data in a

concatenated command

Table 3--8 lists warning messages that do not interrupt the flow of

command execution. These notify you that you may get unexpected

results.

Table 3- 8: Execution warning messages – EXE Bit 4

Code Message

500 Execution warning

510 String data too long, truncated

525 Parameter underrange

526 Parameter overrange

527 Parameter rounded

528 Parameter out of range

530 Data start > stop, Values swapped internally

531 Data stop > record length, Curve truncated

532 Curve data too long, Curve truncated

540 Measurement warning

541 Measurement warning, Low signal amplitude

542 Measurement warning, Unstable histogram

543 Measurement warning, Low resolution

Status and Events

3-24 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Table 3- 8: Execution warning messages – EXE Bit 4 (Cont.)

Code Message

544 Measurement warning, Uncertain edge

545 Measurement warning, Invalid in minmax

546 Measurement warning, Need 3 edges

547 Measurement warning, Clipping positive/negative

548 Measurement warning, Clipping positive

549 Measurement warning, Clipping negative

Table 3--9 lists internal errors that indicate an internal fault in the

oscilloscope.

Table 3- 9: Internal warning messages

Code Message

600 Internal warning

Programming Examples

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer 4-1

Programming Examples

The following series of commands and queries illustrate many of the

most common commands and techniques. Table 2--1 on page 2--1

lists oscilloscopes, extension modules, and the communication

protocol you can use with them.

To use these commands and queries over USB, you will need to use

a program or routines that interface to the USBTMC driver on your

PC. You can also use the PC Communications software that came on

the CD with your oscilloscope to get the same data without having to

write programs. For operating information, you can launch the PC

Communications software and refer to the online help.

To use these commands and queries over GPIB, you will need to use

a program or routines that interface to the GPIB hardware in your

computer. The software is usually supplied by the GPIB hardware

manufacturer.

To use these commands and queries over RS-232, you will need to

use a communications program on your computer, such as tip in the

Unix environment, or Hyperterminal in the Microsoft Windows

environment.

In these examples, data sent from the controller computer to the

oscilloscope is prefaced with the > symbol. Replies from the

oscilloscope have no preface.

> rem ”Check for any messages, and clear them from the queue.”

> *esr?

128

> allev?

:ALLEV 401,”Power on; ”

> rem ”Set the scope to the default state.”

> factory

> rem ”Set the scope parameters that differ from the defaults.”

> ch1:volts 2.0

> hor:main:scale 100e-6

> trig:main:level 2.4

Programming Example

4-2 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

> rem ”Start a single sequence acquisition.”

> acquire:stopafter sequence

> acquire:state on

> rem ”Wait for the acquisition to complete.”

> rem ”Note: your controller program time-out must be set long

enough to handle the wait.”

> *opc?

> rem ”Use the oscilloscope built-in measurements to measure the

waveform you acquired.”

> measu:immed:type mean

> measu:immed:value?

:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE 2.4631931782E0

> rem ”Be sure to use the *esr? query to check for measurement

errors.”

> measu:immed:type freq

> Measu:immed:value?

:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE 9.9E37

> *esr?

> allev?

:ALLEV 2202,”Measurement error, No period found; ”

> rem ”Query out the waveform points, for later analysis on your

controller computer.”

> data:encdg ascii

> curve?

:CURVE 7,6,5,5,5,6,6,6,8 [...]

> rem ”Query out the parameters used for caculating the times and

voltages of the waveform points.”

> wfmpre?

:WFMPRE:BYT_NR 1;BIT_NR 8;ENCDG ASC;BN_FMT RP;BYT_OR MSB;NR_PT

2500; [...]

Appendices

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer A-1

Appendix A: ASCII Code Chart

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

NUL

DLE

10 16

20 32

30 48

100

40 64

120

50 80

140

60 96

160

70 112

SOH

DC1

11 17

21 33

31 49

101

41 65

121

51 81

141

61 97

161

71 113

STX

DC2

12 18

22 34

”

32 50

102

42 66

122

52 82

142

62 98

162

72 114

ETX

DC3

13 19

23 35

33 51

103

43 67

123

53 83

143

63 99

163

73 115

EOT

DC4

14 20

24 36

34 52

104

44 68

124

54 84

144

64 100

164

74 116

ENQ

NAK

15 21

25 37

35 53

105

45 69

125

55 85

145

65 101

165

75 117

ACK

SYN

16 22

26 38

36 54

106

46 70

126

56 86

146

66 102

166

76 118

BEL

ETB

17 23

27 39

’

37 55

107

47 71

127

57 87

147

67 103

167

77 119

810

CAN

18 24

(

28 40

38 56

110

48 72

130

58 88

150

68 104

170

78 120

911

19 25

)

29 41

39 57

111

49 73

131

59 89

151

69 105

171

79 121

Continued on next page

Appendix A: ASCII Code Chart

A-2 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

76543210

A12

A10

SUB

1A 26

2A 42

3A 58

112

4A 74

132

5A 90

152

6A 106

172

7A 122

B13

B11

ESC

1B 27

2B 43

;

3B 59

113

4B 75

133

[

5B 91

153

6B 107

173

{

7B 123

C14

C12

1C 28

2C 44

3C 60

114

4C 76

134

5C 92

154

6C 108

174

7C 124

D15

D13

1D 29

2D 45

3D 61

115

4D 77

135

]

5D 93

155

6D 109

175

}

7D 125

E16

E14

1E 30

2E 46

3E 62

116

4E 78

136

5E 94

156

6E 110

176

7E 126

F17

F15

1F 31

2F 47

3F 63

117

4F 79

137

5F 95

157

6F 111

177

DEL

(RUBOUT)

7F 127

NAK

15 21

hex

octal

decimal

ASCII character

KEY

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer B-1

Appendix B: Factory Setup

The following listing is the instrument response to the concatenated

command FACtory;SET?. This response describes the factory default

setup in detail. (Carriage returns have been inserted for clarity.)

Items enclosed in ( ) parentheses are returned by the SET? query

response, but are not changed by the FACtory command.

TDS1000B and TDS2000B Series Oscilloscopes

This is a typical response for 2 channel models with a monochrome

display.

:HEADER 1;:VERBOSE 1;

:DATA:ENCDG RIBINARY;DESTINATION REFA;SOURCE CH1;START

1;STOP 2500;WIDTH 1;

:LOCK NONE;

:DISPLAY:FORMAT YT;STYLE VECTORS;PERSISTENCE 0;CONTRAST

50;INVERT OFF;

:ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE;NUMAVG 16;STATE 1;STOPAFTER

RUNSTOP;

:CH1:PROBE 1.0E1;CURRENTPROBE 1.0E1;SCALE 1.0E0;POSITION

0.0E0;COUPLING DC;BANDWIDTH OFF;INVERT OFF;YUNIT ”V”;

:CH2:PROBE 1.0E1;CURRENTPROBE 1.0E1;SCALE 1.0E0;POSITION

0.0E0;COUPLING DC;BANDWIDTH OFF;INVERT OFF;YUNIT ”V”;

:HORIZONTAL:VIEW MAIN;MAIN:SCALE 5.0E-4;POSITION

0.0E0;

:HORIZONTAL:DELAY:SCALE 5.0E-5;POSITION 0.0E0;

:TRIGGER:MAIN:MODE AUTO;TYPE EDGE;HOLDOFF:VALUE

5.0E-7;

:TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:SOURCE CH1;COUPLING DC;SLOPE RISE;

Appendix B: Factory Setup

B-2 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

:TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SOURCE CH1;SYNC LINE;POLARITY

NORMAL;LINE 1;STANDARD NTSC;

:TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SOURCE CH1;WIDTH:POLARITY

POSITIVE;WHEN EQUAL;WIDTH 1.0E-3;

:TRIGGER:MAIN:LEVEL 0.0E0;:SELECT:CH1 1;CH2 0;MATH

0;REFA 0;REFB 0;

:CURSOR:FUNCTION OFF;SELECT:SOURCE CH1;

:CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS SECONDS;POSITION1 -2.0E-3;POSITION2

2.0E-3;

:CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1 3.2E0;POSITION2 -3.2E0;

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS5:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;

:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE PERIOD;SOURCE1 CH1;

:MATH:DEFINE ”CH1 - CH2”;VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0E0;SCALE

2.0E0;

:MATH:FFT:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 5.0E1;SCALE 1.0E0;

:MATH:FFT:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0E0;SCALE 1.0E0;

:HARDCOPY:BUTTON PRINTS;FORMAT JPEG;PORT USB;LAYOUT

PORTRAIT;INKSAVER ON;

:PICTBRIDGE:PAPERSIZE DEFLT;IMAGESIZE DEFLT;PAPERTYPE

DEFLT;PRINTQUAL DEFLT;DATEPRINT DEFLT;IDPRINT DEFLT;

:LANGUAGE ENGLISH;

:AUTORANGE:SETTINGS BOTH;

:SAVE:IMAGE:FILEFORMAT JPEG

Appendix B: Factory Setup

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer B-3

TPS2000 Series Oscilloscopes

Items enclosed in < > brackets are present only when the

TPS2PWR1 Power Application Module software key is installed.

This is a typical response for 2 channel models.

:HEADER 1;:VERBOSE 1;

:DATA:ENCDG RIBINARY;DESTINATION REFA;SOURCE CH1;START

1;STOP 2500;WIDTH 1;

:LOCK NONE;

:DISPLAY:FORMAT YT;STYLE VECTORS;PERSISTENCE

0;BRIGHTNESS 30;CONTRAST 50;INVERT OFF;

:ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE;NUMAVG 16;STATE 1;STOPAFTER

RUNSTOP;

:CH1:PROBE 1.0E1;CURRENTPROBE 1.0E1;SCALE 1.0E0;POSITION

0.0E0;COUPLING DC;BANDWIDTH OFF;INVERT OFF;YUNIT ”V”;

:CH2:PROBE 1.0E1;CURRENTPROBE 1.0E1;SCALE 1.0E0;POSITION

0.0E0;COUPLING DC;BANDWIDTH OFF;INVERT OFF;YUNIT ”V”;

:HORIZONTAL:VIEW MAIN;MAIN:SCALE 5.0E-4;POSITION 0.0E0;

:HORIZONTAL:DELAY:SCALE 5.0E-5;POSITION 0.0E0;

:TRIGGER:MAIN:MODE AUTO;TYPE EDGE;HOLDOFF:VALUE 5.0E-7;

:TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:SOURCE CH1;COUPLING DC;SLOPE RISE;

:TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SOURCE CH1;SYNC LINE;POLARITY

NORMAL;LINE 1;STANDARD NTSC;

:TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SOURCE CH1;WIDTH:POLARITY

POSITIVE;WHEN EQUAL;WIDTH 1.0E- 3;

:TRIGGER:MAIN:LEVEL 0.0E0;:SELECT:CH1 1;CH2 0;MATH

0;REFA 0;REFB 0;

:CURSOR:FUNCTION OFF;SELECT:SOURCE CH1;

:CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS SECONDS;POSITION1 -2.0E-3;POSITION2

2.0E-3;

Appendix B: Factory Setup

B-4 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

:CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1 3.2E0;POSITION2 -3.2E0;

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS5:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;

:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE PERIOD;SOURCE1

CH1;<SOURCE2 CH2;>

:MATH:DEFINE ”CH1 - CH2”;VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0E0;SCALE

2.0E0;

:MATH:FFT:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 5.0E1;SCALE 1.0E0;

:MATH:FFT:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0E0;SCALE 1.0E0;

:HARDCOPY:BUTTON PRINTS;FORMAT EPSON;PORT

CENTRONICS;LAYOUT PORTRAIT;INKSAVER ON;

:LANGUAGE ENGLISH;

:AUTORANGE:SETTINGS BOTH;

:SAVE:IMAGE:FILE FORMAT BMP;

<:POWERANALYSIS:SOURCES CH1CH2;>

<:WAVEFORMANALYSIS:SOURCE CH1;>

<:HARMONICS:ENABLE OFF;SETUP AUTOMATIC;SHOW ALL;SELECT

1;SOURCE CH1;>

<:SWLOSS:ACQUIRE CONTINUOUS;ENABLE OFF;SOURCES

CH1CH2;STOPAFTER 50;TONSTART 90;TONEND 10;TOFFSTART

10;TOFFEND 10;VSAT 1.0E0;UNITS WATTS>

Appendix B: Factory Setup

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer B-5

TDS1000 and TDS2000 Series Oscilloscopes

Items enclosed in < > angle brackets are present only when the

TDS2MEM module is installed.

Responses for channel 3 and 4 apply only to 4-channel models.

:HEADER 1;(:VERBOSE 1;)

:DATA:ENCDG RIBINARY;DESTINATION REFA;SOURCE CH1;START

1;STOP 2500;WIDTH 1;

(:LOCK NONE;)

:DISPLAY:FORMAT YT;STYLE VECTORS;PERSISTENCE 0;(CONTRAST

50);(INVERT OFF);

:ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE;NUMAVG 16;STATE 1;STOPAFTER

RUNSTOP;

:CH1:PROBE 10;SCALE 1.0E0;POSITION 0.0E0;COUPLING

DC;BANDWIDTH OFF;INVERT OFF;

:CH2:PROBE 10;SCALE 1.0E0;POSITION 0.0E0;COUPLING

DC;BANDWIDTH OFF;INVERT OFF;

:CH3:PROBE 10;SCALE 1.0E0;POSITION 0.0E0;COUPLING

DC;BANDWIDTH OFF;INVERT OFF;

:CH4:PROBE 10;SCALE 1.0E0;POSITION 0.0E0;COUPLING

DC;BANDWIDTH OFF;INVERT OFF;

:HORIZONTAL:VIEW MAIN;MAIN:SCALE 5.0E-4;POSITION 0.0E0;

:HORIZONTAL:DELAY:SCALE 5.0E-5;POSITION 0.0E0;

:TRIGGER:MAIN:MODE AUTO;TYPE EDGE;HOLDOFF:VALUE 5.0E-7;

:TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:SOURCE CH1;COUPLING DC;SLOPE RISE;

:TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SOURCE CH1;SYNC LINE;POLARITY

NORMAL;LINE 1;STANDARD NTSC;

:TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SOURCE CH1;WIDTH:POLARITY

POSITIVE;WHEN EQUAL;WIDTH 1.0E-3;

:TRIGGER:MAIN:LEVEL 0.0E0;

Appendix B: Factory Setup

B-6 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

:SELECT:CH1 1;CH2 0;CH3 0;CH4 0;MATH 0;REFA 0;REFB

0;REFC 0;REFD 0;

:CURSOR:FUNCTION OFF;SELECT:SOURCE CH1;

:CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS SECONDS;POSITION1 -2.0E-3;POSITION2

2.0E-3;

:CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1 -3.2E0;POSITION2 3.2E0;

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS5:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;

:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE PERIOD;SOURCE CH1;

:MATH:DEFINE ”CH1 - CH2”;FFT:HORIZONTAL:POSITION

5.0E1;SCALE 1.0E0;

:MATH:FFT:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0E0;SCALE 1.0E0;

(:HARDCOPY:<BUTTON PRINTS;>FORMAT EPSON;PORT

CENTRONICS;LAYOUT PORTRAIT;INKSAVER ON;)

(<SAVE:IMAGE:FILEFORMAT BMP;>)

(:LANGUAGE ENGLISH)

TDS210 and TDS220 Oscilloscopes

Items enclosed in < > brackets are present only when the TDS2MM

module is installed.

:HEADER 1;(:VERBOSE 1;)

:DATA:ENCDG RIBINARY;DESTINATION REFA;SOURCE CH1;

START 1;STOP 2500;WIDTH 1;

(:LOCK NONE;)

:DISPLAY:FORMAT YT;STYLE VECTORS;PERSISTENCE 0;

CONTRAST 50;

Appendix B: Factory Setup

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer B-7

:ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE;NUMAVG 16;STATE 1;

STOPAFTER RUNSTOP;

:CH1:PROBE 10;SCALE 1.0E0;POSITION 0.0E0;

COUPLING DC;BANDWIDTH OFF;<INVERT OFF;>

:CH2:PROBE 10;SCALE 1.0E0;POSITION 0.0E0;

COUPLING DC;BANDWIDTH OFF;<INVERT OFF;>

:HORIZONTAL:VIEW MAIN; MAIN:SCALE 5.0E-4;POSITION 0.0E0;

:HORIZONTAL:DELAY:SCALE 5.0E-5;POSITION 0.0E0;

:TRIGGER:MAIN:MODE AUTO;TYPE EDGE; HOLDOFF:VALUE 5.0E-7;

:TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:SOURCE CH1;COUPLING DC;SLOPE RISE;

:TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SOURCE CH1;SYNC LINE;POLARITY

NORMAL;

:TRIGGER:MAIN:LEVEL 0.0E0;

:SELECT:CH1 1;CH2 0;MATH 0;REFA 0;REFB 0;

:CURSOR:FUNCTION OFF;SELECT:SOURCE CH1;

:CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS SECONDS; POSITION1 -2.0E-3;

POSITION2 2.0E-3;

:CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1 -3.2E0; POSITION2 3.2E0;

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;

:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE PERIOD;SOURCE CH1;

:MATH:DEFINE ”CH1 + CH2”;

<FFT:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 5.0E1;SCALE 1.0E0;>

<:MATH:FFT:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0E0;SCALE 1.0E0;>

(:HARDCOPY:FORMAT EPSON;PORT CENTRONICS; LAYOUT

PORTRAIT;)

(:LANGUAGE ENGLISH)

Appendix B: Factory Setup

B-8 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

TDS224 Oscilloscopes

Items enclosed in < > brackets are present only when the TDS2MM

module is installed.

:HEADER 1;(:VERBOSE 1;)

:DATA:ENCDG RIBINARY;DESTINATION REFA;SOURCE CH1;

START 1;STOP 2500;WIDTH 1;

(:LOCK NONE;)

:DISPLAY:FORMAT YT;STYLE VECTORS;PERSISTENCE 0;

CONTRAST 50;

:ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE;NUMAVG 16;STATE 1;STOPAFTER

RUNSTOP;

:CH1:PROBE 10;SCALE 1.0E0;POSITION 0.0E0;COUPLING

DC;BANDWIDTH OFF;INVERT OFF;

:CH2:PROBE 10;SCALE 1.0E0;POSITION 0.0E0;COUPLING

DC;BANDWIDTH OFF;INVERT OFF;

:CH3:PROBE 10;SCALE 1.0E0;POSITION 0.0E0;COUPLING

DC;BANDWIDTH OFF;INVERT OFF;

:CH4:PROBE 10;SCALE 1.0E0;POSITION 0.0E0;COUPLING

DC;BANDWIDTH OFF;INVERT OFF;

:HORIZONTAL:VIEW MAIN;MAIN:SCALE 5.0E-4;POSITION 0.0E0;

:HORIZONTAL:DELAY:SCALE 5.0E-5; POSITION 0.0E0;

:TRIGGER:MAIN:MODE AUTO;TYPE EDGE; HOLDOFF:VALUE 5.0E-7;

:TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:SOURCE CH1;COUPLING DC;SLOPE RISE;

:TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SOURCE CH1;SYNC LINE;POLARITY

NORMAL;

:TRIGGER:MAIN:LEVEL 0.0E0;

:SELECT:CH1 1;CH2 0;CH3 0;CH4 0;MATH 0;REFA 0; REFB

0;REFC 0;REFD 0;

:CURSOR:FUNCTION OFF;SELECT:SOURCE CH1;

Appendix B: Factory Setup

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer B-9

:CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS SECONDS;POSITION1 -2.0E-3;

POSITION2 2.0E-3;

:CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1 -3.2E0;POSITION2 3.2E0;

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;

:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE PERIOD;SOURCE CH1;

:MATH:DEFINE ”CH1 - CH2”;

<FFT:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 5.0E1;SCALE 1.0E0;>

<:MATH:FFT:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0E0;SCALE 1.0E0;>

(:HARDCOPY:FORMAT EPSON;PORT CENTRONICS; LAYOUT

PORTRAIT;)

(:LANGUAGE ENGLISH)

Appendix B: Factory Setup

B-10 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Glossary and Index

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 ProgrammerGlossary- 1

Glossary

ASCII

Acronym for the American Standard Code for Information

Interchange. Controllers transmit commands to the digitizing

oscilloscope using ASCII character encoding.

Address

A 7-bit code that identifies an instrument on the communication

bus. The digitizing oscilloscope must have a unique address for

the controller to recognize and transmit commands to it.

Backus-Naur Form (BNF)

A standard notation system for command syntax. The syntax in

this manual use BNF notation.

Controller

A computer or other device that sends commands to and accepts

responses from the digitizing oscilloscope.

EOI

A mnemonic referring to the control line “End or Identify” on

the GPIB interface bus. One of the two possible end-of-message

terminators.

EOM

A generic acronym referring to the end-of-message terminator.

For GPIB, the end-of-message terminator is either an EOI or the

ASCII code for line feed (LF). For RS--232, the end-of-message

terminator is the ASCII code for line feed (LF). For USB, the

end-of-message terminator is the EOM bit in a USBTMC

message.

GPIB Address

When communicating with a TDS1000B or TDS2000B series

oscilloscope using a TEK-USB-488 adapter, you can set a

unique GPIB address for the oscilloscope in the UTILITY"

Options "GPIB Setup option.

Glossary

Glossary- 2TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

IEEE

Acronym for the Institute of Electrical and Electronics

Engineers.

RS-232

A serial, full-duplex, asynchronous communication port that

follows ANSI/EIA/TIA-562-1989[1], ANSI/EIA/

TIA-574-1990[2], and CCITT V.24-1989[3] standards.

Serial Poll

A device (such as an oscilloscope) on the GPIB bus can request

service from the GPIB Controller by asserting the GPIB SRQ

line (a Hardware line that is only present on the GPIB

communications bus). A device on the USB bus can request

service from the host by sending an SRQ packet on the

Interrupt-IN endpoint. When a controller or a USB host

acknowledges the SRQ, it “serial polls” each open device on the

bus to determine which device on the bus requested service. Any

device requesting service returns a status byte with bit 6 set and

then unasserts the SRQ line (GPIB only). Devices not requiring

service return a status byte with bit 6 cleared.

USB

An acronym for Universal Serial Bus.

USBTMC

An acronym for USB Test and Measurement Class.

USB488

The USBTMC subclass specification that implements an

IEEE488-like interface over USB.

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer Index- 1

Index

Abbreviating, commands, 2--6

ACQUIRE?, 2--45

ACQUIRE:MODE, 2--46

ACQUIRE:NUMACQ?, 2--47

ACQUIRE:NUMAVG, 2--48

ACQUIRE:STATE, 2--49

ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER, 2--50

Acquisition command group, 2--15

Acquisition commands

ACQUIRE?, 2--45

ACQUIRE:MODE, 2--46

ACQUIRE:NUMACQ?, 2--47

ACQUIRE:NUMAVG, 2--48

ACQUIRE:STATE, 2--49

ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER, 2--50

ALLEV?, 2--51

Argument, command, 2--3

ASCII, 2--1

code chart, A--1

AUTORANGE?, 2--52

AUTORANGE:SETTINGS, 2--54

AUTORANGE:STATE, 2--53

AUTOSET, 2--55

AUTOSET:ENABLE, 2--55

AUTOSET:SIGNAL, 2--55

AUTOSET:VIEW, 2--56

Block, command argument, 2--13

BNF (Backus Naur form), 2--2

Break signal, 2--5

BUSY?, 2--57, 3--13

*CAL?, 2--58

CALIBRATE:ABORT, 2--59

CALIBRATE:CONTINUE, 2--60

CALIBRATE:FACTory, 2--60

CALIBRATE:INTERNAL, 2--61

CALIBRATE:STATUS?, 2--62

Calibration and diagnostic com-

mand group, 2--16

Calibration and diagnostic com-

mands

*CAL?, 2--58

CALIBRATE:ABORT, 2--59

CALIBRATE:CONTINUE, 2--60

CALIBRATE:FACTory, 2--60

CALIBRATE:INTERNAL, 2--61

CALIBRATE:STATUS?, 2--62

DIAG:RESULT:FLAG?, 2--96

DIAG:RESULT:LOG?, 2--96

ERRORLOG:FIRST?, 2--102

ERRORLOG:NEXT?, 2--102

CH<x>, command mnemonic, 2--9

CH<x>?, 2--62

CH<x>:BANDWIDTH, 2--63

CH<x>:COUPLING, 2--64

CH<x>:CURRENTPROBE, 2--65

CH<x>:INVERT, 2--66

CH<x>:POSITION, 2--67

CH<x>:PROBE, 2--68

CH<x>:SCALE, 2--69

CH<x>:VOLTS, 2--70

CH<x>:YUNIT, 2--71

Channel, command mnemonic, 2--9

Clear status, 2--71

Index

Index- 2 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

*CLS, 2--71

Command

abbreviating, 2--6

argument, 2--3

block argument, 2--13

BUSY?, 3--13

common, 2--25, 2--33

concatenating, 2--6

definition, 2--4

header, 2--3

message, 2--2

mnemonic, 2--3

*OPC, 3--14

query, 2--2

separator, 2--3

set, 2--2

synchronizing, 3--10

syntax, 2--1

BNF (Backus Naur form), 2--2

*WAI, 3--11

Command argument

numeric, 2--11

quoted string, 2--12

Command entry rules, 2--6

Command group

acquisition, 2--15

calibration and diagnostic, 2--16

cursor, 2--17

display, 2--18

file system (TDS2MEM only),

2--19

hardcopy, 2--20

horizontal, 2--21

math, 2--22

measurement, 2--23

miscellaneous, 2--25

PictBridge, 2--27

power and battery related, 2--28

power measurements, 2--28

RS-232, 2--32

save and recall, 2--32

status and error, 2--33

trigger, 2--34

vertical, 2--36

waveform, 2--37

Command mnemonic

CH<x>, 2--9

channel, 2--9

MEAS<x>, 2--10

measurement specifier, 2--10

REF<x>, 2--9

reference waveform, 2--9

waveform, 2--10

<wfm>, 2--10

Command syntax, BNF (Backus

Naur form), 2--2

Common command, 2--33

Common GPIB commands

*CAL?, 2--58

CALIBRATE:CONTINUE, 2--60

CALIBRATE:FACTory, 2--60

CALIBRATE:INTERNAL, 2--61

CALIBRATE:STATUS?, 2--62

*CLS, 2--71

communications modules, refer-

ences to, xi

Concatenating, command, 2--6

Configuration, command query,

2--143

Conventions, xi

Cursor command group, 2--17

Cursor commands

CURSOR?, 2--72

CURSOR:FUNCTION, 2--73

CURSOR:HBARS?, 2--74

CURSOR:HBARS:DELTA?,

2--74

CURSOR:HBARS:POSI-

TION<x>, 2--75

CURSOR:HBARS:UNITS?,

2--76

Index

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer Index- 3

CURSOR:SELECT:SOURCE,

2--77

CURSOR:VBARS?, 2--78

CURSOR:VBARS:DELTA?,

2--78

CURSOR:VBARS:HDELTA?,

2--79

CURSOR:VBARS:HPOS<x>?,

2--80

CURSOR:VBARS:POSI-

TION<x>, 2--81

CURSOR:VBARS:SLOPE?,

2--82

CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS, 2--82

CURSOR:VBARS:VDELTA?,

2--83

CURSOR?, 2--72

CURSOR:FUNCTION, 2--73

CURSOR:HBARS?, 2--74

CURSOR:HBARS:DELTA?, 2--74

CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION<x>,

2--75

CURSOR:HBARS:UNITS?, 2--76

CURSOR:SELECT:SOURCE,

2--77

CURSOR:VBARS?, 2--78

CURSOR:VBARS:DELTA?, 2--78

CURSOR:VBARS:HDELTA?,

2--79

CURSOR:VBARS:HPOS<x>?,

2--80

CURSOR:VBARS:POSITION<x>,

2--81

CURSOR:VBARS:SLOPE?, 2--82

CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS, 2--82

CURSOR:VBARS:VDELTA?,

2--83

CURVE, 2--84

DATA, 2--85

DATA:DESTINATION, 2--86

DATA:ENCDG, 2--87

DATA:SOURCE, 2--89

DATA:S TART, 2 -- 90

DATA:STOP, 2--91

DATA:TARGET, 2--92

DATA:WIDTH, 2--92

DATE, 2--93

DCL, 2--5, 3--7

*DDT, 2--93

DESE command, 2--94, 3--5

DESER register, 2--94, 2--181, 3--4

Device clear, 2--5

DIAG:RESULT:FLAG?, 2--96

DIAG:RESULT:LOG?, 2--96

Display command group, 2--18

Display commands

DISPLAY?, 2--97

DISPLAY:BRIGHTNESS, 2--97

DISPLAY:CONTRAST, 2--98

DISPLAY:FORMAT, 2--99

DISPLAY:INVERT, 2--100

DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE,

2--100

DISPLAY:STYLE, 2--101

DISPLAY?, 2--97

DISPLAY:BRIGHTNESS, 2--97

DISPLAY:CONTRAST, 2--98

DISPLAY:FORMAT, 2--99

DISPLAY:INVERT, 2--100

DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE, 2--100

DISPLAY:STYLE, 2--101

Documentation, vii

Index

Index- 4 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Entering commands, 2--6

Entering incorrect numeric argu-

ments, 2--11

EOM (end of message), 2--8

Error message, programming

interface, 3--17

ERRORLOG:FIRST?, 2--102

ERRORLOG:NEXT?, 2--102

*ESE, 2--103, 3--5

ESER register, 2--103, 2--181, 3--5

*ESR?, 2--104

*ESR? query, 3--2

Event handling, 3--1

Event query, 2--105

Event queue, 2--105, 3--7

Event queue sequence, 3--8

EVENT?, 2--105

EVMSG?, 2--105

EVQTY?, 2--106

Example programming, 4--1

Examples

block argument, 2--14

Programming, 4--1

quoted strings, 2--13

FACTORY, 2--107

Factory setup, detailed description,

B--1

File system command group, 2--19

File system commands

FILESYSTEM?, 2--108

FILESYSTEM:CWD, 2--109

FILESYSTEM:DELETE, 2--110

FILESYSTEM:DIR, 2--110

FILESYSTEM:FORMAT, 2--111

FILESYSTEM:FREESPACE,

2--112

FILESYSTEM:MKDIR, 2--113

FILESYSTEM:RENAME, 2--114

FILESYSTEM:RMDIR, 2--115

FILESYSTEM?, 2--108

FILESYSTEM:CWD, 2--109

FILESYSTEM:DELETE, 2--110

FILESYSTEM:DIR?, 2--110

FILESYSTEM:FORMAT, 2--111

FILESYSTEM:FREESPACE?,

2--112

FILESYSTEM:MKDIR, 2--113

FILESYSTEM:RENAME, 2--114

FILESystem:RMDIR, 2--115

GPIB, EOM (end of message), 2--8

Hard copy command group, 2--20

Hard copy commands

HARDCOPY, 2--116

HARDCOPY:BUTTON, 2--117

HARDCOPY:FORMAT, 2--118

HARDCOPY:INKSAVER ,

2--120

HARDCOPY:LAYOUT, 2--121

HARDCOPY:PORT, 2--122

HARDCOPY, 2--116

HARDCOPY:BUTTON, 2--117

HARDCOPY:FORMAT, 2--118

HARDCOPY:INKSAVER , 2--120

HARDCOPY:LAYOUT, 2--121

HARDCOPY:PORT, 2--122

HARMONICS?, 2--123

HARMONICS:ENABLE, 2--124

HARMONICS:FREQUENCY?,

2--124

HARMONICS:HRMS?, 2--125

Index

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer Index- 5

HARMONICS:PERCENT?, 2--126

HARMONICS:PHASE?, 2--126

HARMONICS:RMS?, 2--127

HARMONICS:SAVE?, 2--127

HARMONICS:SELECT, 2--128

HARMONICS:SETUP?, 2--129

HARMONICS:SHOW, 2--130

HARMONICS:SOURCE, 2--131

HARMONICS:THDF?, 2--131

HARMONICS:THDR?, 2--132

HDR, 2--132

HEADER, 2--133

Header

command, 2--3, 2--133

included in query response,

2--133, 2--241

Headers, in query responses, 2--5

Horizontal command group, 2--21

Horizontal commands

HORIZONTAL?, 2--134

HORIZONTAL:DELAY?, 2--134

HORIZONTAL:DELAY:POSI-

TION, 2--135, 2--137, 2--139

HORIZONTAL:DELAY:SCALE,

2--136

HORIZONTAL:DELAY:SEC-

DIV, 2--137

HORIZONTAL:MAIN?, 2--137

HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SCALE,

2--138

HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SECDIV,

2--139

HORIZONTAL:RECORD-

LENGTH, 2--140

HORIZONTAL:SCALE, 2--140

HORIZONTAL:SECDIV, 2--140

HORIZONTAL:TRIG-

GER:POSITION, 2--141

HORIZONTAL?, 2--134

HORIZONTAL:DELAY?, 2--134

HORIZONTAL:DELAY:POSI-

TION, 2--135, 2--137, 2--139

HORIZONTAL:DELAY:SCALE,

2--136

HORIZONTAL:DELAY:SECDIV,

2--137

HORIZONTAL:MAIN?, 2--137

HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SCALE,

2--138

HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SECDIV,

2--139

HORIZONTAL:RECORD-

LENGTH, 2--140

HORIZONTAL:SCALE, 2--140

HORIZONTAL:SECDIV, 2--140

HORIZONTAL:TRIGGER:POSI-

TION, 2--141

ID?, 2--141

*IDN?, 2--143

IEEE Std. 488.2--1987, 2--2, 2--25,

2--33

LANGUAGE, 2--145

LOCK, 2--145

*LRN?, 2--146

Manual trigger, simulation with

command, 2--221

Manuals, vii

Math command group, 2--22

Index

Index- 6 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Math commands

MATH?, 2--146

MATH:DEFINE, 2--147

MATH:FFT:HORIZON-

TAL:POSITION, 2--150

MATH:FFT:HORIZON-

TAL:SCALE, 2--151

MATH:FFT:VERTICAL:POSI-

TION, 2--152

MATH:FFT:VERTICAL:SCALE,

2--153

MATH:VERTICAL?, 2--150,

2--154

MATH:VERTICAL:POSITION,

2--154

MATH:VERTICAL:SCALE,

2--155

MATH?, 2--146

MATH:DEFINE, 2--147

MATH:FFT:HORIZONTAL:POSI-

TION, 2--150

MATH:FFT:HORIZON-

TAL:SCALE, 2--151

MATH:FFT:VERTICAL:POSI-

TION, 2--152

MATH:FFT:VERTICAL:SCALE,

2--153

MATH:VERTICAL?, 2--150,

2--154

MATH:VERTICAL:POSITION,

2--154

MATH:VERTICAL:SCALE,

2--155

MEAS<x>, command mnemonic,

2--10

Measurement command group,

2--23

Measurement commands

MEASUREMENT?, 2--155

MEASUREMENT:IMMED?,

2--156

MEASUREMENT:IMMED:

SOURCE1, 2--157

MEASUREMENT:IMMED:

TYPE, 2--158

MEASUREMENT:IMMED:

UNITS?, 2--161

MEASUREMENT:IMMED:

VALUE?, 2--162

MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>?,

2--163

MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>:

TYPE, 2--164

MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>:

UNITS?, 2--167

MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>:

VALUE?, 2--168

MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>:

SOURCE, 2--164

Measurement specifier, command

mnemonic, 2--10

MEASUREMENT?, 2--155

MEASUREMENT:IMMED?,

2--156

MEASUREMENT:IMMED:

SOURCE1, 2--157

MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE,

2--158

MEASUREMENT:IMMED:

UNITS?, 2--161

MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VAL-

UE?, 2--162

MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>?,

2--163

MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>:

TYPE, 2--164

MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>:

UNITS?, 2--167

MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>:

VALUE?, 2--168

MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>:

SOURCE, 2--164

Index

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer Index- 7

Message

command, 2--2

command terminator, 2--8

handling, 3--1

table of program messages, 3--17

Miscellaneous command group,

2--25

Miscellaneous commands

AUTORANGE?, 2--52

AUTORANGE:SETTINGS,

2--54

AUTORANGE:STATE, 2--53

AUTOSET, 2--55

AUTOSET:ENABLE, 2--55

AUTOSET:SIGNAL, 2--55

AUTOSET:VIEW, 2--56

*DDT, 2--93

FACTORY, 2--107

HDR, 2--132

HEADER, 2--133

*IDN?, 2--143

LANGUAGE, 2--145

LOCK, 2--145

*LRN?, 2--146

REM, 2--184

SET, 2--197

TIME, 2--220

*TRG, 2--221

UNLOCK, 2--240

VERBOSE, 2--241

Mnemonic, command, 2--3

Numeric, command argument,

2--11

Numeric argument coercion, 2--11

*OPC, 2--169, 3--14

Operation complete command,

2--169

Operation complete wait, 2--242

Output queue, 3--6

PictBridge command group, 2--27

PictBridge commands

PICTBRIDGE:DATEPRINT,

2--174

PICTBRIDGE:DEF, 2--171

PICTBRIDGE:IDPRINT, 2--175

PICTBRIDGE:IMAGESIZE,

2--172

PICTBRIDGE:PAPERSIZE,

2--171

PICTBRIDGE:PAPERTYPE,

2--173

PICTBRIDGE:PRINTQUAL,

2--174

PICTBRIDGE:DATEPRINT,

2--174

PICTBRIDGE:DEF, 2--171

PICTBRIDGE:IDPRINT, 2--175

PICTBRIDGE:IMAGESIZE,

2--172

PICTBRIDGE:PAPERSIZE, 2--171

PICTBRIDGE:PAPERTYPE,

2--173

PICTBRIDGE:PRINTQUAL,

2--174

Power and Battery Related com-

mand group, 2--28

Index

Index- 8 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Power and Battery--Related com-

mands

POWER?, 2--176

POWER:AC:PRESENT?, 2--176

POWER:BATTERIES:TIME?,

2--178

POWER:BATTERY<x>:GAS-

GAUGE?, 2--177

POWER:BATTERY<x>:STA-

TUS?, 2--178

POWER:BUTTONLIGHT,

2--179

Power Measurement command

group, 2--28

Power Measurement commands

HARMONICS?, 2--123

HARMONICS:ENABLE, 2--124

HARMONICS:FREQUENCY?,

2--124

HARMONICS:HRMS?, 2--125

HARMONICS:PERCENT?,

2--126

HARMONICS:PHASE?, 2--126

HARMONICS:RMS?, 2--127

HARMONICS:SAVE?, 2--127

HARMONICS:SELECT, 2--128

HARMONICS:SETUP?, 2--129

HARMONICS:SHOW, 2--130

HARMONICS:SOURCE, 2--131

HARMONICS:THDF?, 2--131

HARMONICS:THDR?, 2--132

POWERANALYSIS:SOURCES,

2--180

SWLOSS?, 2--200

SWLOSS:ACQUIRE, 2--200

SWLOSS:AVERAGE:CON-

DUCTION?, 2--201

SWLOSS:AVERAGE:N?, 2--202

SWLOSS:AVERAGE:TOTAL?,

2--203

SWLOSS:AVERAGE:TURN-

OFF?, 2--203

SWLOSS:AVERAGE:TUR-

NON?, 2--204

SWLOSS:ENABLE, 2--205

SWLOSS:LEVELS, 2--206

SWLOSS:LOG:CONDUC-

TION?, 2--206

SWLOSS:LOG:INDEX, 2--207

SWLOSS:LOG:TOTAL, 2--208

SWLOSS:LOG:TURNOFF?,

2--209

SWLOSS:LOG:TURNON?,

2--210

SWLOSS:SAVE, 2--211

SWLOSS:SOURCES, 2--211

SWLOSS:STOPAFTER, 2--212

SWLOSS:TOFFEND, 2--213

SWLOSS:TOFFSTART, 2--215

SWLOSS:TONEND, 2--214

SWLOSS:TONSTART?, 2--215

SWLOSS:UNITS, 2--216

SWLOSS:VALUE:CONDUC-

TION?, 2--217

SWLOSS:VALUE:TOTAL?,

2--218

SWLOSS:VALUE:TURNOFF?,

2--218

SWLOSS:VALUE:TURNON?,

2--219

SWLOSS:VSAT, 2--220

POWER?, 2--176

POWER:AC:PRESENT?, 2--176

POWER:BATTERIES:TIME?,

2--178

POWER:BATTERY<x>:GAS-

GAUGE?, 2--177

POWER:BATTERY<x>:STA-

TUS?, 2--178

POWER:BUTTONLIGHT, 2--179

Index

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer Index- 9

Power-on status clear command,

2--181

POWERANALYSIS:SOURCES,

2--180

Preamble, waveform, 2--43

Programming, examples, 4--1

Programming examples, 4--1

*PSC, 2--181

*PSC command, 3--6

Query, header in query response,

2--133, 2--241

Query command, 2--2

definition, 2--4

Queue

event, 3--7

event handling sequence, 3--8

output, 3--6

Quoted string, command argument,

2--12

Quoted string examples, 2--13

Quoted string rules, 2--12

*RCL, 2--182

Recall setting command, 2--182

RECALL:SETUP, 2--182

RECALL:WAVEFORM, 2--183

REF<x>, command mnemonic,

2--9

Reference waveform, command

mnemonic, 2--9

DESER, 2--94, 2--181, 3--4

ESER, 2--103, 2--181, 3--5

SBR, 2--199, 3--3

SESR, 2--71, 2--104, 2--169, 3--2

SRER, 2--181, 2--198, 3--5

REM, 2--184

Reset

command, 2--190

to factory settings, 2--107

RS-232 command group, 2--32

RS232 commands

RS232?, 2--185

RS232:BAUD, 2--185

RS232:HARDFLAGGING,

2--186

RS232:PARITY, 2--187

RS232:SOFTFLAGGING, 2--188

RS232:TRANSMIT:TERMINA-

TOR, 2--189

RS232?, 2--185

RS232:TRANSMIT:TERMINA-

TOR, 2--189

RS232:BAUD, 2--185

RS232:HARDFLAGGING, 2--186

RS232:PARITY, 2--187

RS232:SOFTFLAGGING, 2--188

*RST, 2--190

Rules, command entry, 2--6

Rules, quoted strings, 2--12

*SAV, 2--191

Save and recall command group,

2--32

Save and recall commands

*RCL, 2--182

RECALL:SETUP, 2--182

*SAV, 2--191

SAVE:IMAGE, 2--192

SAVE:IMAGE:FILEFORMAT,

2--193

SAVE:SETUP, 2--194

SAVE:WAVEFORM, 2--195

Index

Index- 10 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

Save setting command, 2--191

SAVE:IMAGE, 2--192

SAVE:IMAGE:FILEFORMAT,

2--193

SAVE:SETUP, 2--194

SAVE:WAVEFORM, 2--195

SBR register, 2--199, 3--3

SELECT?, 2--196

SELECT:<wfm>, 2--197

Self test, 2--240

Separator, command, 2--3

Serial poll, 3--3

Service request enable command,

2--198

Service request enable register,

2--198

SESR register, 2--71, 2--104, 2--169,

3--2

Set command, 2--2

SET?, 2--197

Setting

command query, 2--146

query, 2--146

recall command, 2--182

save command, 2--191

Setups, factory

TDS1000, B--5

TDS1000B, B--1

TDS2000, B--5

TDS2000B, B--1

TDS210, B--6

TDS220, B--6

TDS224, B--8

TPS2000, B--3

*SRE command, 2--198, 3--5

SRER register, 2--181, 2--198, 3--5

Status, 3--1

Status and error command group,

2--33

Status and error commands

*RST, 2--190

ALLEV?, 2--51

BUSY?, 2--57

*CLS, 2--71

DESE, 2--94, 3--5

*ESE, 2--103, 3--5

*ESR?, 2--104, 3--2

EVENT?, 2--105

EVMSG?, 2--105

EVQTY?, 2--106

ID?, 2--141

*OPC, 2--169

*PSC, 2--181, 3--6

*SRE, 2--198, 3--5

*STB?, 2--199, 3--3

*TST?, 2--240

*WAI, 2--242

*STB?, 2--199

*STB? query, 3--3

SWLOSS?, 2--200

SWLOSS:ACQUIRE, 2--200

SWLOSS:AVERAGE:CONDUC-

TION?, 2--201

SWLOSS:AVERAGE:N?, 2--202

SWLOSS:AVERAGE:TOTAL?,

2--203

SWLOSS:AVERAGE:TURNOFF?,

2--203

SWLOSS:AVERAGE:TURNON?,

2--204

SWLOSS:ENABLE, 2--205

SWLOSS:LEVELS, 2--206

SWLOSS:LOG:CONDUCTION?,

2--206

SWLOSS:LOG:INDEX, 2--207

SWLOSS:LOG:TOTAL, 2--208

SWLOSS:LOG:TURNOFF?,

2--209

SWLOSS:LOG:TURNON?, 2--210

SWLOSS:SAVE, 2--211

SWLOSS:SOURCES, 2--211

SWLOSS:STOPAFTER, 2--212

Index

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer Index- 11

SWLOSS:TOFFEND, 2--213

SWLOSS:TOFFSTART, 2--215

SWLOSS:TONEND, 2--214

SWLOSS:TONSTART?, 2--215

SWLOSS:UNITS, 2--216

SWLOSS:VALUE:CONDUC-

TION?, 2--217

SWLOSS:VALUE:TOTAL?, 2--218

SWLOSS:VALUE:TURNOFF?,

2--218

SWLOSS:VALUE:TURNON?,

2--219

SWLOSS:VSAT, 2--220

Synchronizing commands, 3--10

Syntax

BNF (Backus Naur form), 2--2

command, 2--1

Table, programming message, 3--17

TDS1001 model, xi

TDS2004 model, xi

TDS2CM communications module,

see TDS2CMA, xi

TDS2CMA communications mod-

ule, where to find installation

information, 1--1

TDS2MEM--related commands

DATE, 2--93

FILESYSTEM?, 2--108

FILESYSTEM:CWD, 2--109

FILESYSTEM:DELETE, 2--110

FILESYSTEM:DIR?, 2--110

FILESYSTEM:FORMAT, 2--111

FILESYSTEM:FREESPACE?,

2--112

FILESYSTEM:MKDIR, 2--113

FILESYSTEM:RMDIR, 2--115

HARDCOPY:BUTTON, 2--117

RECALL:SETUP, 2--182

RECALL:WAVEFORM, 2--183

SAVE:IMAGE, 2--192

SAVE:IMAGE:FILEFORMAT,

2--193

SAVE:SETUP, 2--194

SAVE:WAVEFORM, 2--195

TIME, 2--220

TDS2MEM--specific commands,

FILESYSTEM:RENAME,

2--114

TDS2MM measurement module,

where to find installation infor-

mation, 1--1

TDS2MM--related commands

CH<x>:INVERT, 2--66

MATH:DEFINE, 2--147

MATH:FFT:HORIZON-

TAL:POSITION, 2--150

MATH:FFT:HORIZON-

TAL:SCALE, 2--151

MATH:FFT:VERTICAL:POSI-

TION, 2--152

MATH:FFT:VERTICAL:SCALE,

2--153

MATHVERTICAL?, 2--150,

2--154

MEA-

SUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE,

2--158

MEA-

SUREMENT:MEAS<X>:TY

PE, 2--164

WFMPRE:<wfm>:YOFF, 2--263

WFMPRE:WFID?, 2--251

WFMPRE:XINCR, 2--252

WFMPRE:XZERO, 2--254

WFMPRE:YMULT, 2--255

WFMPRE:YOFF, 2--256

WFMPRE:YUNIT, 2--257

Index

Index- 12 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

WFMPRE:YZERO, 2--258

Tek Std. Codes and Formats 1989,

2--25, 2--33

Terminator, command message,

2--8

TIME, 2--220

Time base, manual trigger simula-

tion, 2--221

Transferring data

from the oscilloscope, 2--43

to the oscilloscope, 2--44

*TRG, 2--221

TRIGGER, 2--221

Trigger command group, 2--34

Trigger commands

TRIGGER, 2--221

TRIGGER:MAIN, 2--222

TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE?,

2--223

TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:COU-

PLING, 2--223

TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:

SLOPE, 2--224

TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:

SOURCE, 2--225

TRIGGER:MAIN:FREQUEN-

CY?, 2--226

TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF?,

2--227

TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLD-

OFF:VALUE, 2--227

TRIGGER:MAIN:LEVEL,

2--228

TRIGGER:MAIN:MODE, 2--228

TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE, 2--229

WIDTH, 2--231

TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:

SOURCE, 2--230

TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:

WIDTH

POLARITY , 2--231

WHEN , 2--232

WIDTH , 2--233

TRIGGER:MAIN:TYPE, 2--233

TRIGGER:MAIN:VID-

EO:FIELD, 2--234

TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:LINE

, 2--235

TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:PO-

LARITY, 2--235

TRIGGER:MAIN:VID-

EO:SOURCE, 2--236, 2--238

TRIGGER:MAIN:VID-

EO:STANDARD , 2--237

TRIGGER:STATE?, 2--239

TRIGGER:MAIN, 2--222

TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE?, 2--223

TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:COU-

PLING, 2--223

TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:SLOPE,

2--224

TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:

SOURCE, 2--225

TRIGGER:MAIN:FREQUENCY?,

2--226

TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF?,

2--227

TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLD-

OFF:VALUE, 2--227

TRIGGER:MAIN:LEVEL, 2--228

TRIGGER:MAIN:MODE, 2--228

TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE, 2--229

WIDTH, 2--231

TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:

SOURCE, 2--230

TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH

POLARITY , 2--231

WHEN , 2--232

WIDTH , 2--233

TRIGGER:MAIN:TYPE, 2--233

TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FIELD,

2--234

Index

TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer Index- 13

TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:LINE ,

2--235

TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:PO-

LARITY, 2--235

TRIGGER:MAIN:VID-

EO:SOURCE, 2--236, 2--238

TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:STAN-

DARD , 2--237

TRIGGER:STATE?, 2--239

*TST? query, 2--240

UNLOCK, 2--240

VERBOSE, 2--241

Vertical bar cursors, 2--78, 2--80

Vertical command group, 2--36

Vertical commands

CH<x>?, 2--62

CH<x>:BANDWIDTH, 2--63

CH<x>:COUPLING, 2--64

CH<x>:CURRENTPROBE,

2--65

CH<x>:INVERT, 2--66

CH<x>:POSITION, 2--67

CH<x>:PROBE, 2--68

CH<x>:SCALE, 2--69

CH<x>:VOLTS, 2--70

CH<x>:YUNIT, 2--71

SELECT?, 2--196

SELECT:<wfm>, 2--197

*WAI, 2--242, 3--11

Wait for operation complete, 2--242

Waveform, command mnemonic,

2--10

Waveform command group, 2--37

Waveform commands

CURVE, 2--84

DATA, 2--85

DATA:DESTINATION, 2--86

DATA:ENCDG, 2--87

DATA:SOURCE, 2--89

DATA:S TART, 2 -- 90

DATA:STOP, 2--91

DATA:TARGET, 2--92

DATA:WIDTH, 2--92

WAVEFORMANALY-

SIS:SOURCE, 2--242

WAVFRM?, 2--243

WFMPRE?, 2--244

WFMPRE:<wfm>?, 2--260,

2--263

WFMPRE:<wfm>:NR_PT?,

2--261

WFMPRE:<wfm>:PT_FMT,

2--261

WFMPRE:<wfm>:PT_OFF,

2--261, 2--262

WFMPRE:<wfm>:WFLD?,

2--262

WFMPRE:<wfm>:XINCR,

2--262

WFMPRE:<wfm>:XUNIT,

2--262

WFMPRE:<wfm>:XZERO,

2--262

WFMPRE:<wfm>:YMULT,

2--262

WFMPRE:<wfm>:YOFF, 2--263

WFMPRE:<wfm>:YZERO,

2--263

WFMPRE:BIT_NR, 2--244

WFMPRE:BN_FMT, 2--245

Index

Index- 14 TDS200, TDS1000/2000, TDS1000B/2000B, TPS2000 Programmer

WFMPRE:BYT_NR, 2--246

WFMPRE:BYT_OR, 2--247

WFMPRE:ENCDG, 2--247

WFMPRE:NR_PT?, 2--248

WFMPRE:PT_FMT, 2--249

WFMPRE:PT_OFF, 2--251

WFMPRE:WFID, 2--251

WFMPRE:XINCR, 2--252

WFMPRE:XMULT, 2--259

WFMPRE:XOFF, 2--259

WFMPRE:XUNIT, 2--253

WFMPRE:XZERO, 2--254

WFMPRE:YMULT, 2--255

WFMPRE:YOFF, 2--256

WFMPRE:YUNIT, 2--257

WFMPRE:YZERO, 2--258

WFMPRE:ZMULT, 2--259

WFMPRE:ZOFF, 2--259

WFMPRE:ZUNIT, 2--260

Waveform preamble, 2--43

WAVEFORMANALY-

SIS:SOURCE, 2--242

WAVFRM?, 2--243

<wfm>, command mnemonic,

2--10

WFMPRE?, 2--244

WFMPRE:<wfm>?, 2--260, 2--263

WFMPRE:<wfm>:NR_PT?, 2--261

WFMPRE:<wfm>:PT_FMT, 2--261

WFMPRE:<wfm>:PT_OFF,

2--261, 2--262

WFMPRE:<wfm>:WFLD?, 2--262

WFMPRE:<wfm>:XINCR, 2--262

WFMPRE:<wfm>:XUNIT, 2--262

WFMPRE:<wfm>:XZERO, 2--262

WFMPRE:<wfm>:YMULT, 2--262

WFMPRE:<wfm>:YOFF, 2--263

WFMPRE:<wfm>:YZERO, 2--263

WFMPRE:BIT_NR, 2--244

WFMPRE:BN_FMT, 2--245

WFMPRE:BYT_NR, 2--246

WFMPRE:BYT_OR, 2--247

WFMPRE:ENCDG, 2--247

WFMPRE:NR_PT?, 2--248

WFMPRE:PT_FMT, 2--249

WFMPRE:PT_OFF, 2--251

WFMPRE:WFID, 2--251

WFMPRE:XINCR, 2--252

WFMPRE:XMULT, 2--259

WFMPRE:XOFF, 2--259

WFMPRE:XUNIT, 2--253

WFMPRE:XZERO, 2--254

WFMPRE:YMULT, 2--255

WFMPRE:YOFF, 2--256

WFMPRE:YUNIT, 2--257

WFMPRE:YZERO, 2--258

WFMPRE:ZMULT, 2--259

WFMPRE:ZOFF, 2--259

WFMPRE:ZUNIT, 2--260

TDS200, TDS1000/TDS2000, TDS1000B/TDS2000B, And TPS2000 Series Digital Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual Tektronix TDS

Tektronix_TDS_Programmer_Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation